JP2022069108A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can suitably increase attention on a game.SOLUTION: As game states, provided are first to third normal game states having different degrees of advantage. If a 10R probability change jackpot is hit in the first normal game state, the game shifts into a second normal game state. If the 10R probability change jackpot is hit and a continuous frequency stored in a continuous frequency counter for time-reduction reaches 10 times in the second normal game, the game shifts into the third normal game state. If the limiter for probability change starts in the third normal game state, the game shifts into the first normal game state. If the 10R probability change jackpot is hit before the limiter for probability change starts in the third normal game, the game shifts into the second normal game state. An average predetermined period for the game to shift from the second normal game state via the third normal game state to the first/second normal game state is longer than an average predetermined period to shift from the first normal game state via the second normal game state to the third normal game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by the player. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-78904

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to gaming.

The present invention
The game board where the game area is formed, and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a gaming ball based on the entry into the entry portion provided in the gaming area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the entry section, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and a determination means.
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable entry section as the entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered is provided.
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than that of the first special gaming state are provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player,
In the second gaming state, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined flow path in the gaming area, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, whereby the first. Compared to the gaming state and the third gaming state, it is easier to shift to the first special gaming state.
A continuous number storage means for storing at least the number of consecutive times that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained during the second gaming state.
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, the first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state and
When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches the specified number, the second transition condition is satisfied and the special gaming state is set. A second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state upon termination, and
A third transition means for shifting to the first gaming state with the end of the special gaming state when the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state.
A fourth transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state when the fourth transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state is provided.
The first transition means, the second transition means, the third transition means, and the fourth transition means shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in this order, and the third gaming state. When shifting to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the second game ball is continuously launched toward a predetermined route in the gaming area. During the average required period from the gaming state to the transition to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state via the third gaming state, the firing of the gaming ball toward the predetermined route is continuous. It is characterized in that it is configured so as to be longer than the average required period from the first gaming state to the transition to the third gaming state via the second gaming state under the situation of being executed. do.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. (A) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) a front view of the main display unit. It is a front view of a variable winning unit. (A) A front perspective view of the first variable winning device, and (b) a schematic view showing a passage structure according to (b) the first variable winning device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow path in a variable winning unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 1st actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 2nd actuating opening. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the second operating port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a hit type and various modes. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for a 1st actuating opening. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 1st actuating opening. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for the 2nd actuating opening. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 2nd actuating opening. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a schematic diagram comparing the variable display time and the fixed display time for each support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display time setting process for a working port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the difference of the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the difference of the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the difference of the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a schematic diagram which compared each game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the holding ball with the progress of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the actuation opening in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 1st variable winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the actuation opening in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the jackpot result. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the holding ball with the progress of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the actuation opening in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display time table for the 3rd normal game state. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the fluctuation display time and the transition moment to a special game state. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the setting process for the 3rd normal game state. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate materials on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the amusement park.

The gaming machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. The support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main portion 12 has an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main portion 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. See Figure 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE described later can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is blocked from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder for holding the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each of these glass panels back and forth with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination unit 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window unit 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up at the time of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that lights up during the payout of the prize ball is provided on the left and right sides thereof. A ball lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The game ball that has entered the front door side upper plate passage is guided to the upper plate 33, and the game ball that has entered the front door side lower plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the rotation tip side on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hook fittings 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. ..

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protrusion shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

An insertion hole for inserting a hook fitting 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotation tip side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook fitting 49 is locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the hook receiving member for the front door) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 cannot be unlocked with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the locking device 55 has an inner frame hook member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 57 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 (see FIG. 2) of the outer frame 11 to lock the gaming machine main portion 12 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated in the locking device 55, and when the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked with respect to the inner frame 13 and inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11 when the key is turned counterclockwise.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 has a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE on which the game ball flows down is formed on this exposed portion, that is, on the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 60. A general winning opening 61, an operating ball entry portion 62, 63, a variable winning device 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like are arranged at each opening. When a ball enters a winning portion such as a general winning opening 61, an operating entry portion 62, 63, or a variable winning device 64, 65, it is detected by a detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are awarded based on the detection result. Benefits such as paying out balls are given to the player.

Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the actuated entry unit 62, two game balls are paid out. Is executed, one game ball is paid out when the ball is entered into the activated ball entry unit 63, and 12 pieces are executed when the first variable winning device 64 is entered. The payout of the game balls is executed, and when the ball is entered into the second variable winning device 65, the payout of six game balls is executed.

An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 60, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening portion, and the game ball has passed through the opening portion as well as the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of a game ball into the out opening 68, the entry into the general winning opening 61, the actuated entry section 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66. Is also expressed as "winning".

Further, in the game board 60, a large number of nails 69 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. Depending on the various configurations of the nail 69, the windmill, and the like, the flow path of the game ball is differentiated, and the above-mentioned general winning opening 61 and the like are adjusted so that a prize is generated with an appropriate probability. The general winning opening 61 is arranged only on the left route described later, and the game ball launched to the left route can be awarded to the general winning opening 61, while the right route described later can be used. It is not possible to win a prize in the general winning opening 61 for the launched game ball.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the actuating ball entry portions 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. In the following description, the actuated ball entry unit 62 is referred to as the “first actuated ball entry section 62”, the actuated ball entry section 63 is referred to as the “second actuated ball entry section 63”, and the actuation port of the first actuated ball entry section 62 is referred to as the “first actuating ball entry section 62”. The 1 actuating port 62a and the actuating port of the second actuating ball entry portion 63 are appropriately distinguished as the "second actuating port 63a".

The first actuated ball entry unit 62 is roughly divided into a lower actuated ball entry section 62L arranged below the variable display unit 67 and a right actuation ball entry section 62R arranged to the right of the variable display unit 67. Will be done. Of these lower actuating ball entry section 62L and right actuating ball entry section 62R, the right actuating ball entry section 62R has an electric accessory as an opening / closing assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). 71 is attached.

The electric accessory 71 includes a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter is changed by the drive unit, so that the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R (first actuating port 62a) is provided. It is possible to switch between an open state (accepting state) in which the ball can enter the right operating port 62aR) and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the ball cannot enter. The electric accessory 71 attached to the right-handed ball entry portion 62R may be switched between a state in which the ball can easily enter the right-actuated opening 62aR and a state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 66 is arranged at a position upstream of the right-handed ball entry portion 62R in the game area PE (detailed on the right route described later), specifically on the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67. There is. The through gate 66 allows the game ball to pass in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 66 flows down to the downstream side in the game area PE without being discharged from the game area PE. There is. If a lottery (support lottery) triggered by the passage of the through gate 66 of the game ball is won (support winning), the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time. ..

The first variable winning device 64 is arranged at a position on the right route on the downstream side of the right-handed ball entry portion 62R. The first variable winning device 64 is provided with a first large winning opening in which a plurality of game balls can enter at the same time, and an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening / closing the first large winning opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for the first winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state or accepting state) that allows or facilitates the entry of a game ball, and a closed state (non-assisted or non-accepting state) that makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. It has become. In addition, the shutter is connected to the variable winning drive unit (more specifically, the solenoid), and the shutter is kept in the closed state in the normal state, and the result of the transition to the special game state (open / close execution mode) in the above internal lottery. When it becomes, it can be switched to the open state.

The second variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position on the right route on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 64. The second variable winning device 65 is formed with a lower large winning opening in which a plurality of game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening / closing the lower large winning opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a large winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (accepted state) in which a game ball can enter and a closed state (non-accepted state) in which the same ball cannot enter. In addition, the shutter is connected to the variable winning drive unit (more specifically, the solenoid), and the shutter is kept in the closed state in the normal state, and the result of the transition to the special game state (open / close execution mode) in the above internal lottery. When it becomes, it can be switched to the open state.

Here, the special gaming state is a gaming state that shifts to a big hit or a special hit. As an opening mode of the variable winning devices 64 and 65 in the special gaming state, for example, a predetermined period (8 sec or 0.8 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed or a predetermined number (10 or 6 in the present embodiment) has passed. ) Is set as one round, and the shutter is set to be released up to a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 10 rounds in the present embodiment) as the upper limit.

The details will be described later, but regarding the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) shown in the present embodiment, the variable winning device to be opened and the one corresponding to the first winning mode and the second winning mode having different opening / closing modes are supported. It is roughly divided into things.

If a big hit result is obtained, the game shifts to a special gaming state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special gaming state corresponding to the first winning mode (first special gaming state), the first variable winning device 64 or the second variable winning device 65 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (specifically, 30 sec) has elapsed or Opening is repeated up to a plurality of rounds, with a predetermined number (10 in detail) of incoming balls as one round. On the other hand, if a special hit result is obtained, the game shifts to a special game card corresponding to the second winning mode. In the special gaming state corresponding to the second winning mode (second special gaming state), the second variable winning device 65 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (0.8 sec in detail) has elapsed or a predetermined number (detailed in detail). The second special gaming state ends when any of the 6) ball innings is established. In this way, the first special gaming state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special gaming state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained is set. There is a difference.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (variates) the symbol by using the winning of the actuated ball entry units 62 and 63 as a trigger.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the central portion of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction so as to be variablely displayed. Then, in the case of a big hit or a special hit, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. The symbol display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

Further, in the variable display unit 67, a center frame 76 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front surface side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 stand up from the front surface of the game board 60. The gap between the ball and the ball is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). It is roughly divided into the above right route that detours from the left side and the left route that detours from the left side.

The above-mentioned right-handed ball entry unit 62R, second actuated ball entry unit 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and the game ball flowing down the left route is on the right side. Winning to the actuated ball entry unit 62R, the second actuated ball entry unit 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the first actuating ball entry portion 62 is arranged on the left route, and the game ball flowing down the right route goes to the first actuating ball entry portion 62 (lower actuating port 62aL constituting the first actuating opening 62a). Winning is avoided. By selecting the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route / the left route according to the game situation, the player can advance the game in his / her own advantage. Although the details will be described later, in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, the player is suggested to the player a route for launching the gaming ball according to the gaming state on the display screen 75a of the speaker unit 29 and the symbol display device 75. If the game ball is launched to a route different from the suggested route, a warning is given to the effect that the launch should be stopped.

A main display unit 81 is arranged on a protective member for the guide rail 100 arranged outside the game area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side) that makes the gaming area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the facing portion thereof is A main display unit D for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is configured to be controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D has a first operating port display unit D1 for displaying lottery results based on winning a prize in the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a), and a second operating ball entry unit 63 (second operating ball entry unit 63). It has a second operating port display unit D2 that displays the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of the two operating ports 63a).

In the display unit D1 for the first operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a) as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the first operation input is performed. The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the ball portion 62 is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating ball entry unit 62 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the variable display is stopped on the display unit D1 for the first operating opening. , After the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result, the game shifts to the above special gaming state.

In the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second operating ball entry unit 63 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the second operating ball entry unit 63 (the second operating port). The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of 63a) is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating ball entry unit 63 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit or the special hit, the variable display is stopped and stopped on the display unit D2 for the second operating port. As a result, after the predetermined pattern is displayed, the game shifts to the special gaming state according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the actuated ball entry units 62 and 63, the variable display is started on the corresponding actuating port display units D1 and D2, and then the predetermined stop result is displayed. The period until the variable display is stopped and the preset fixed display time elapses while the stopped state is maintained corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, even if a single display area is provided and any of the actuated ball entry portions 62 and 63 is awarded, the single display area is provided. In a configuration in which variable display is performed in one display area, variable display is started in the single display area, the variable display is stopped so as to display a predetermined stop result, and then the stop is performed. The game may be played once until the preset confirmed display time elapses while maintaining the state.

The main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port. The holding number display unit S1 for the first operating port corresponds to the first operating port 62a, and the number of times the game ball wins the first operating port 62a is held up to four times, and the holding number display unit for the first operating port is held. The number of holds is displayed by lighting S1. It should be noted that the second actuating port 63a shown in the present embodiment does not have the holding function as provided to the first actuating port 62a, and the first actuating port 62a has a configuration related to ball entry. It's different.

In addition to the various display units, the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate display unit DS that displays lottery results based on winning a prize in the through gate 66. In the through gate display unit DS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 66, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is obtained. Be specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit DS and displayed in a variable manner. After the is stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is held up to 4 times, but the number of holdings is displayed on the main display unit D of the main display unit 81. A hold number display unit SS for a through gate is provided.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 2, the game ball toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50. A game ball launching mechanism 110 for firing is provided. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and a base plate 114 to which various configurations 111 to 113 thereof are mounted are provided as a main configuration, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 to be attached to the resin base 50. On the other hand, it is integrated.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined up toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper for holding the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the above-mentioned launch standby position is arranged at a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, in detail, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is divided by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 41, the area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (left route) and the area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the same game area PE (right route). It is possible to separate the game balls to.

In the game board 60, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversal of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guidance passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the subsequent game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE in advance.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game board 60, and a gap is formed at a predetermined interval between the inlet portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. Will be. The foul ball passage 46 leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 46 is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

In the resin base 50, a through hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14), and a passage forming member is formed in this through hole. 121 is arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has an upper plate passage on the main body side and a lower plate passage on the main body side. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage leads to a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage. Below the lower plate passage on the main body side, the upper plate passage on the front door side is arranged.

Below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof, and an urging member that urges the front position to close the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure and closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled can be prevented. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing fittings 132 are vertically arranged side by side on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing portions are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification / effect control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification / effect control device unit 142 is configured to include a notification / effect control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the notification / effect control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The notification / effect control device 143 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 145 made of the same.

On the back surface of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a set plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The collecting plate 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings, a detection mechanism for detecting the entry of game balls into various winning openings, and the like.

Explaining the game ball collection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with collection passages individually corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages descend from the ball entry portion along the back surface of the game board 60, and define a fall path for the game ball. The collection passages meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the entry part such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection passage. Will be. The exit portion of each collection passage is open downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side thereof (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. The out port 68 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collecting plate 150 is provided with detection sensors individually corresponding to various entry portions such as the general winning opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball is in a state where the drop path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects entry into a ball entry port such as a general winning opening 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area is adopted.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device unit 160 (specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and the detection signals in these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Is output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and the configurations associated therewith will be described.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collecting plate 150 from the rear side, and is mounted on the game board 60 by a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the same.

The board box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the sealing part, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed, and once opened. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing portions. When the board box 163 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is connected. Disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

A plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box 163 so as to project laterally. These bonded pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the bonding piece and the bonded piece perform a sealing process between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161. Will be.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 protruding rearward of the pachinko machine 10 to form a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board 213 on the upper right portion thereof. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal board 213, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins are inserted into a bearing fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By allowing the back pack unit 15, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the rotating tip portion of the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener for fastening to the fastened hole provided in the inner frame 13, and by fitting the fastener into the fastened hole. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The base portion 211 is provided with a payout mechanism portion 202 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and is open upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221 and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls discharged from the payout device 222 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is on the main body side described above. It is formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the upper plate passage on the front door side, and the outer opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the lower plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the front door side. ..

As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball derived from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the payout control device 181 and the power supply / firing control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181 the payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in the board box, and the state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam can be cleared.

In the power supply / launch control device 191, a power supply / launch control board is housed in a board box, and a predetermined power supply required by various control devices or the like is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is launched by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled by the operation of the handle 41. Further, the power supply / emission control device 191 is provided with a RAM erasing switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, if the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the second actuating ball entry portion 63 and the variable winning devices 64 and 65 arranged on the right route is characteristic. Of the game balls launched to the right route, most of the game balls that have passed through the right-handed ball entry unit 62R head toward the ball entry unit 300 arranged on the downstream side of the right-side actuated ball entry section 62R on the right route. It will be. The ball entry unit 300 is integrated with the above-mentioned second actuating entry section 63 and variable winning devices 64 and 65. Hereinafter, the ball entry unit 300 will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 5 to 7. 5A and 5B are front views of the ball winning unit 300, FIG. 6A is a perspective view of the first variable winning device 64 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 6B is an outline showing a passage structure in the first variable winning device 64. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the passage length and the required passage time.

(Entering ball unit 300)
The ball entry unit 300 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 forming a part of the right route (specifically, a downstream area) is formed, and the housing 320 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. It is fixed to the game board 60 in the state. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center side (left side). The entrance portion 321a of the ball entry unit 300 (ball passage 321) is formed in the upper right portion of the bulging portion of the housing 320 so as to face upward, and the exit portion of the ball entry unit 300 (ball passage 321) is formed in the lower left portion. 321b is formed so as to face left.

The exit portion 321b is located directly below the lower actuating entry portion 62L constituting the first actuating entry portion 62, and the game ball flowing out from the exit portion 321b is guided below the lower actuating entry portion 62L. To. As a result, entry of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 into the lower actuating entry portion 62L is avoided.

The housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, a gaming ball flowing down the ball passage 321) can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity between the second actuating ball entry portion 63 and the variable winning devices 64, 65, the housing 320 may be opaque and the internal structure may be configured to be difficult or impossible to see.

The right route branches into the following two flow paths above the ball entry unit 300. That is, it is branched into an inner route in which the game ball flows down toward the entrance portion 321a of the ball passage 321 and an outer route in which the game ball flows down along the upper surface portion of the ball entry unit 300 (housing 320).

A second actuated ball entry portion 63 is disposed on the upper portion of the housing 320 so that the second actuating port 63a faces the center side (left side) of the game area PE, and the game ball flowing down the outer route is provided. A part of it flows into the second operating port 63a. It should be noted that the game ball that has passed through this outer route is also guided to the downstream side (lower side) of the lower actuating entry portion 62L constituting the first actuating entry portion 62, and is under the game ball that has passed through the outer route. The entry into the side-operated entry section 62L is avoided.

The above-mentioned ball passage 321 has a passage width, a passage height, and the like defined so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is generated in the middle position in the passage direction. There is. Specifically, the ball passage 321 comprises a horizontally long upstream passage portion 322 that constitutes an upstream portion of the ball passage 321 and is inclined downward toward the center side of the game machine, and a game machine that constitutes a downstream portion of the ball passage 321. The horizontally long downstream passage portion 324, which is inclined downward to the center side, is provided so as to have a height difference so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side. The 322 and the downstream passage portion 324 are connected by an intermediate passage portion 323 (corresponding to a "communication passage portion") extending in the vertical direction.

The first variable winning device 64 is attached to the upstream passage portion 322. Specifically, the first large winning opening 331 of the first variable winning device 64 is opened upward, and the upstream passage portion 322 is formed so as to cross above the first large winning opening 331. .. The first variable winning device 64 includes a shutter 333 as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the first large winning opening 331, and a drive unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 333. The shutter 333 can be slid back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60), and is connected to the drive unit 332 via a power transmission mechanism.

The drive unit 332 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-drive state (non-excitation state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 333 is arranged in a closed position covering the first special winning opening 331 from above, and the drive signal is output to the drive unit. When the 332 is in the driving state (excited state), it moves (retracts) to an open position that does not cover the first large winning opening 331.

Here, in the state where the shutter 333 is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 333 forms the bottom portion of the upstream passage portion 322, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, the housing 320 has an upstream side bottom portion 322a forming a bottom portion on the upstream side of the first large winning opening 331 in the passage direction of the upstream side passage portion 322, and a first. A downstream bottom portion 322b forming a bottom portion on the downstream side of the large winning opening 331 is provided, and a rolling surface of the game ball is formed by these upstream side bottom portion 322a, downstream side bottom portion 322b, and shutter 333. In the following description, the region where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 333 in the upstream side passage portion 322, that is, the region facing the first large winning opening 331 across the shutter 333 in the upstream side passage portion 322. It is called "first specific region SE1" (see FIG. 5).

The game ball that has reached the first specific region SE1 under the condition that the shutter 333 is arranged at the open position and the upstream passage portion 322 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. It will be difficult to move to, and it will flow into the first prize opening 331.

In the present embodiment, the first specific area SE1 is devised to slow down the game ball passing through the first specific area SE1 to increase the chances of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 331. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). In addition, in FIG. 6 (b), the path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line.

The front wall portion 335 and the rear wall portion 336 that partition the passage of the upstream side passage portion 322 in the housing 320 are provided with ridge portions 335a and 336a projecting toward the first specific region SE1. .. The ridges 335a and 336a extend vertically so as to be orthogonal to the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322. In the following description, the ridge portion 335a arranged on the front wall portion 335 is referred to as "front ridge portion 335a", and the ridge portion 336a arranged on the rear wall portion 336 is referred to as "rear side ridge portion 336a". ".

The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall portion 336 and the front ridge portion 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall portion 335 and the rear ridge portion 336a is also set. It is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality (two in the present embodiment) of the front ridge portion 335a are arranged in the passage direction (guidance direction) of the upstream side passage portion 322 with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality of side ridges 336a (two in the present embodiment) are arranged with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball in the passage direction (guidance direction) of the upstream passage portion 322. By alternately arranging the front ridges 335a and the rear ridges 336a, the flow path of the game ball is devised so as to meander back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

Here, when the amount of protrusion of the front ridge portion 335a, the amount of protrusion of the rear side ridge portion 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball are added, the width is larger than the passage width of the upstream side passage portion 322. It is configured (D3 <D). As a result, the game ball is prevented from running through the first specific region SE1 so as to avoid a collision with the protrusions 335a and 336a.

The game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 collides with the ridge portions 335a and 336a. Due to such a collision, the moving speed of the game ball in the first specific region SE1 decreases (decelerates). That is, the first specific region SE1 of the upstream passage portion 322 functions as a deceleration section for forcibly decelerating the game ball. By decelerating the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 in this way, the game ball passes through the first specific region SE1 as compared with the case where the ridge portions 335a and 336a are not provided. The time required for this is extended.

The ridges 335a and 336a are arranged in the first specific region SE1 so as to be offset to a position closer to the intermediate passage portion 323. As a result, the game ball is decelerated at a position directly upstream of the intermediate passage portion 323.

The game balls that did not flow into the first large winning opening 331 continue to move along the ball passage 321 as they are, and most of them reach the downstream passage portion 324. Here, with reference to FIG. 5 again, the downstream side passage portion 324 and the second variable winning device 65 associated therewith will be described.

The second large winning opening 341 of the second variable winning device 65 is open upward, and the downstream passage portion 324 is formed so as to cross above the second large winning opening 341. The second variable winning device 65 includes a shutter 343 as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the second large winning opening 341, and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 343. The shutter 343 can be slid back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and is connected to the drive unit via a power transmission mechanism.

The drive unit for the shutter 343 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. In the non-drive state (non-excitation state) in which the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 343 is arranged in a closed position covering the second special winning opening 341 from above, and the drive signal is output to drive the shutter. When the unit is in the driving state (excited state), it moves (retracts) to an open position that does not cover the second large winning opening 341.

Here, in the state where the shutter 343 is arranged in the closed position, the shutter 343 forms the bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom portion that forms a bottom portion on the downstream side of the second prize opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream side passage portion 324, and the game is provided by these downstream side bottom portions and the shutter 343. The rolling surface of the sphere is formed. In the following description, the region where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 343 in the downstream side passage portion 324, that is, the region facing the second large winning opening 341 with the shutter 343 sandwiched by the downstream side passage portion 324. It is called "second specific area SE2".

The game ball that has reached the second specific region SE2 under the condition that the shutter 343 is arranged in the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324. It will be difficult to move to, and it will flow into the second prize opening 341.

As with the first specific region SE, the second specific region SE2 may also be provided with a deceleration section composed of a plurality of ridges to decelerate the game ball passing through the second specific region SE2. be.

The above-mentioned intermediate passage portion 323 extends upward from the upstream end portion of the shutter 343. The left passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323 is located on the extension of the upstream passage portion 322, and the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 is oriented by colliding with the left passage wall surface. Will be changed, and the intermediate passage portion 323 will be dropped toward the shutter 343.

An opening through which a game ball can pass is formed in the right passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323, and a part of the game ball passing through the intermediate passage portion 323 flows into the opening. A discharge passage is formed between the right-side actuated ball entry unit 62R and the second variable winning device 65 to discharge the game ball flowing into the opening from the ball entry unit 300. A part of the game ball flowing down the ball passage 321 is discharged from the ball entry unit 300 through the opening → discharge passage before reaching the second variable winning device 65 (shutter 343). Since the game ball passing through this discharge passage is guided to the back side of the game board 60 as it is, the movement to the out port 68 is avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the relationship between the passage length of each part of the ball passage 321 and the passage time required for the game ball will be supplementarily described. FIG. 7 is a schematic view of the internal structure of the ball entry unit 300 as viewed from the front. In the following description, the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is referred to as "required time T1", and the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is referred to as "required time T2".

The degree of deceleration in the first specific region SE1 is defined as follows. That is, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific region SE1 T1 is specified to be longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball.

Of the game balls launched to the right route, the game balls that have passed through the second actuating entry unit 63 will be distributed to the inner route and the outer route. Of these, almost all of the game balls distributed to the inner route reach the first specific area SE1. Here, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific region SE1 T1 is twice the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec) and the interval time between rounds during the special game state (1.5 sec). ) Is specified to be longer (more specifically, 1.8 sec). This is a device for suppressing the spill of the game ball that has reached the first variable winning device 64 during the interval between rounds in the special game state.

Although the second specific area SE2 is formed so that the passage length in the front view of the gaming machine is longer than that of the first specific area SE1, the time required for the game ball to pass through the second specific area SE2 is T2. Is specified to be longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the gaming ball, but shorter than the required time T1 (specifically, 0.8 sec). This is a device to lower the winning probability of the second variable winning device 65 than that of the first variable winning device 64. The number of winnings when the second variable winning device 65 is opened in the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the low frequency winning mode is about one.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 602 is mounted on the main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. It is an element having a built-in RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the functions of the ROM 603 and the functions of the RAM 604, are provided as another element.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 605 provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 181 and various detection sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 602. A power supply / emission control device 191 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. Further, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the first actuating ball entry section 62, a detection sensor 391c for the second actuating ball entry section 63, and a first variable winning section. The detection sensor 391d for the device 64, the detection sensor 391e for the second variable winning device 65, and the detection sensor 391f for the through gate 66 are connected, and the detection information (detection signal) from these various detection sensors 391a to 391f is connected. Based on this, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a winning determination (ball entry determination) or the like for each ball entry unit. Further, in the MPU 602, a lottery for generating a big hit is executed based on the winning of the first actuating ball entry unit 62 (first actuating port 62a) and the second actuating ball entry section 63 (second actuating port 63a).

A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / effect control device 143 (specifically, a notification / effect control board 651) are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball corresponding to the prize. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. Then, when the prize to the general prize opening 61 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the prize to the first large prize opening 331 is specified, 12 pieces are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when a prize is specified for the second major winning opening 341, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of six game balls is output, and the first operation port is output. When a prize is specified for 62a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when a prize for the second operating port 63a is specified, one game ball is paid out. The prize ball command that was issued is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / effect control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, a drive unit 72 for driving the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuating ball entry unit 62R, a variable winning drive unit 451 for driving the shutter 333 of the first variable winning device 64, and a second variable A variable winning drive unit 461 for driving the shutter 343 of the winning device 65, a main display unit 81, and the like are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601. Through the driver circuits, the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like.

That is, in the MPU 602, the variable winning drive unit 451 and the second variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 64 are variable so that the first large winning opening 331 and the second special winning opening 341 are opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. The drive control of the winning drive unit 461 is executed. Further, for example, at each game round, the display control of the first operating port display unit D1 and the second operating port display unit D2 in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602.

Further, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. For example, when the game result is a big hit result, the MPU 602 can output a big hit signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the big hit signal output terminal. Specifically, in the normal state, the LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when the jackpot result is obtained, the HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply / emission control device 191 and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 601 and the payout control device 181 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. More specifically, the power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and the launch intensity (rate of fire) of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 based on the information from the operation level detection sensor. ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball launch handle 41, and in the power supply / launch control device 191 the player touches the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information. It is configured so that it can be grasped whether or not it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor, and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated, the game ball is launched. Will be allowed.

The information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 via the power supply / emission control device 191.

The notification / effect control device 143 includes a notification / effect control board 651 on which the MPU 652 is mounted, and the MPU 652 has a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 653. RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like, is built in.

The notification / effect control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. It is a thing. Specifically, in the notification / effect control device 143, a variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 and a stop display mode of the symbol to be finally stopped are displayed (for example, of the symbol) based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the content of the reach effect, and the like are determined, and the determined content is added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 710.

The display control device 710 has a display control board on which the MPU is mounted, and the MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. It has a built-in RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing such as, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, and a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. There is. The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 143.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be described. In the central portion (variation display completion area) of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are set. On the display screen 75a, the symbols in each of these symbol rows are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

Further, on the display screen 75a, one symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of three symbols are stopped and displayed. If the variation display stops in the order of right symbol column → left symbol column → middle symbol column, and the variation display of all symbol columns ends with a predetermined symbol combination formed on the valid line, the jackpot result or special hit result will be displayed. A video showing the transition to the corresponding special gaming state is displayed.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). The row) and the middle symbol row can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Incidentally, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to be horizontal.

Regarding the change / stop display of the symbol in the central portion of the display screen 75a, it corresponds to the mode corresponding to the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a according to the type of the normal gaming state. It is configured to switch depending on the mode. Specifically, in the first normal game state and the third normal game state, which will be described later, the change / stop display of the symbol in the central portion of the display screen 75a corresponds to the game times related to the first operation port 62a. In the second normal game state, the change / stop display of the symbol in the central portion of the display screen 75a corresponds to the game times related to the second operating port 63a.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The hold display area is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a are arranged in the left-right direction, and a predetermined hold image (hold) is displayed. It is composed of a hold number display area for the first operating port that can individually display an icon) and an execution target display area that can display a predetermined hold image (hold icon) of a game to be executed. ..

Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in the first operating port 62a, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the holding number display area for the first operating opening displays the first unit holding. An area, a second unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set. For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62a, a predetermined holding image (holding icon) is displayed in the first unit holding display area, and the game ball is the first. When the number of holdings is 4 when the operation port 62a is won, a predetermined holding image (holding icon) is displayed in all of the 1st unit holding display area to the 4th unit holding display area. ing. It should be noted that the display / non-display of these reserved images is switched depending on the type of the gaming state (the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state described later). Specifically, in the first normal game state and the third normal game state in which the game times related to the first operation port 62a are the main, a predetermined hold image (hold icon) is displayed, while the second operation port is displayed. In the second normal game state in which the game times related to 63a are the main, the predetermined hold image (hold icon) is not displayed.

(About various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 9, the configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during the game to perform a lottery to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode), set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), set the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of big hits and special hits, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the type when a big hit result is obtained, and the symbol display. Occurrence of reach display when the device 75 disengages and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the operating port D1 of the main display unit 81. It is decided to use the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the pattern in D2 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75. Further, an open random number counter C4 used for a lottery (support lottery) as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuated ball entry portion 62R is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604.

The RAM 604 is provided with a holding ball storage area 632 including a holding area Ra for the first operating port, a first executing area AE1 for the first operating port, and a second executing area AE2 for the second operating port. There is. Then, in the reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. It is designed to be stored in chronological order.

More specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "599"). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62a, and the second execution area of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63a. It is stored in AE2.

The value of the random number that wins the big hit and the value of the random number that wins the special win are stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 621 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 10 and 11. As the hit / fail table, a hit / fail table group for the first actuating port 62a (see FIG. 10) and a hit / fail table for the second actuating port 63a (see FIG. 11) are provided, and the ball enters the first actuating port 62a. In the lottery based on the above, the winning / failing table for the first operating port 62a is referred to, and in the lottery based on entering the ball into the second operating opening 63a, the winning / failing table for the second operating port 63a is referred to.

(Win / fail table for the first operating port)
A case where the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10A. When the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the big hit is two, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 300, and other than those values, it corresponds to the deviation result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 2/600, the special hit probability is 300/600, and the miss probability is 298/600.

Next, a case where the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). When the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the big hit is 20, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 300, and other than those values, it corresponds to the deviation result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 20/600, the special hit probability is 300/600, and the miss probability is 280/600.

(Win / fail table for the second operating port)
A case where the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 11A. When the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the big hit is two, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 0, and other than those values, it corresponds to the outlier result. As a result, the jackpot probability is 2/600, the special hit probability is 0/600, and the miss probability is 598/600.

Next, a case where the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode will be described with reference to FIG. 11B. When the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the number of random number values (that is, winning information) that wins the big hit is 20, and the value of the random number that wins the special winning (that is, that is). The number of winning information) is 0, and all but the values of those random numbers correspond to the outlier results. As a result, the jackpot probability is 20/600, the special hit probability is 0/600, and the miss probability is 580/600.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 9, the hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0" to "999", reach the maximum value (that is, "999"), and then return to 0. There is. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62a, and the second execution area of the RAM 604 when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63a. It is stored in AE2.

The distribution destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 622 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined with reference to the hit type counter C2 and the distribution table. As the type of jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot A and 10R probability variation jackpot B are provided.

The distribution table for each operating port is normally stored for each type of gaming state. Here, the types of normal gaming states will be described. Regarding the normal game state, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode, the first normal game state (so-called normal), and the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the electric accessory 71. The second normal game state (so-called probability change) in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the third normal game state (so-called latent probability) in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low-frequency support mode. The first normal game state to the third normal game state are switched via the special game state corresponding to the jackpot result.

(Distribution table for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 12A, the distribution table for the first operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal gaming state, a distribution table for the second normal gaming state, and a distribution table for the third normal gaming state. It is roughly divided into the distribution table of.

Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 665 (first result) of "0" to "664" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 2R probability variation jackpots. Corresponding, a total of 333 pieces (second result) of "665" to "997" correspond to 10R probability variation jackpot A, and a total of two pieces (third result) of "998" to "999" are 10R. It corresponds to the probability change jackpot A.

Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 665 (first result) of "0" to "664" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 2R probability variation jackpots. Corresponding, a total of 333 pieces (second result) of "665" to "997" correspond to 10R probability variation jackpot A, and a total of two pieces (third result) of "998" to "999" are 10R. It corresponds to the probability change jackpot A.

Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 665 (first result) of "0" to "664" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 2R probability variation jackpots. Corresponding, a total of 333 pieces (second result) of "665" to "997" correspond to 2R probability change jackpot, and a total of two pieces (third result) of "998" to "999" correspond to 10R probability change. It corresponds to the jackpot A.

In the present embodiment, the probability of change is 100% when a big hit result is obtained by a winning / failing lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 62a.

(Distribution table for the second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 12B, the distribution table for the second operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal gaming state, a distribution table for the second normal gaming state, and a distribution table for the third normal gaming state. It is roughly divided into the distribution table of.

Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 1000 pieces of "0" to "999" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot B. .. Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 1000 pieces of "0" to "999" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A. .. Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 1000 pieces of "0" to "999" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot B. ..

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the 2R probability variation jackpot is a control mode in the special gaming state. The winning mode corresponds to the high frequency winning mode, and the opening target is the second variable winning device 65 on the downstream side. It is stipulated in. In the special gaming state triggered by the 2R probability variation jackpot, the opening time of the second variable winning device 65 is 8 sec, and the round game is repeated twice (see FIG. 14). In the special gaming state, approximately 120 prize balls are awarded to the player by continuing to launch the gaming balls toward the right route.

The 10R probability variation jackpot A and the 10R probability variation jackpot B are control modes in the special gaming state. The winning mode corresponds to the high frequency winning mode, and the opening target is defined to be the first variable winning device 64 on the upstream side. There is. In the special gaming state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the opening time of the first variable winning device 64 is 8 sec, and the round game is repeated 10 times (see FIG. 14). In the special gaming state, approximately 12,000 prize balls are awarded to the player by continuing to launch the gaming balls toward the right route.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the 2R probability variation jackpot and the 10R probability variation jackpot B are jackpots that shift to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state (open / close execution mode). be. On the other hand, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is a jackpot that shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode).

Regarding the above-mentioned special hit, the winning mode, which is the control mode in the special gaming state, corresponds to the low-frequency winning mode, and it is stipulated that the opening target is the second variable winning device 65 on the downstream side. .. In the special game state triggered by the special hit, the opening time of the second variable winning device 65 is 0.8 sec, and the round game is executed only once (see FIG. 14). In the special game state, about 6 prize balls are given to the player by continuing to shoot the game balls toward the right route.

By the way, for special hits, the function to change the type of normal gaming state is not given. In other words, basically, after the special gaming state corresponding to the special hit is completed, it returns to the normal gaming state before shifting to the special gaming state, and the configuration does not substantially affect the switching of the normal gaming state. It has become. In the following description, the special gaming state that shifts with a big hit as a trigger is referred to as a "first special gaming state", and the special gaming state that shifts with a special hit as a trigger is appropriately distinguished as a "second special gaming state".

Returning to the description of FIG. 9, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 62a, and the second operating port of the RAM 604 is stored at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 63a. It is stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, whether or not to generate the reach display (reach state) is appropriately determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603.

Here, the reach display is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the game result varies depending on the game times when the game result corresponds to the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after display can be a special display result, after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 75 is started, before the stop display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be possible is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

Explaining the display contents on the display screen 75a in more detail, in the state where the variable display of the symbol is first terminated in the right symbol column and then the variable display of the symbol is terminated in the left symbol column, one of the effective lines is hit and the symbol is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the change display of the symbols is performed in the middle symbol row to reach. It becomes a display. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with the numbers constituting the combination of the hit symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is displayed. Is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. It includes those that perform an effect and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is the variation display time of the pattern in the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the display unit D2 for the second operating port of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), and the variation of the symbol in the symbol display device 75. It is used to determine the display time in the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the first actuating port display unit D1 and the second actuation port display unit D2 (at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 75), the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is set. To be acquired.

The open random number counter C4 for the electric accessory 71 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 249, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, the electric accessory 71 is referred to the value of the stored open random number counter C4 and the support lottery table (win / fail information group) stored in the hit / miss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. An open lottery (support lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to control the open state. The probability of winning support in the high-frequency support mode (details 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in the low-frequency support mode (details 125/250), and high-frequency support. The mode is given preferential treatment.

(About various processes executed by MPU 602 of the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in order to advance the game in each game time by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 will be described. In the MPU 602, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by MPU602.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391f) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a prize has been generated in the first operating port 62a, the winning detection flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and the winning in the second operating port 63a is generated. If it is determined that the flag has been won, the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, and if it is determined that the first variable winning device 64 has been won, the various flag storage areas 635 are used. The winning detection flag for the first big winning opening is stored, and when it is determined that a winning to the second variable winning device 65 has occurred, the winning detection flag for the lower big winning opening is stored in various flag storage areas 635. When it is determined that a prize has been generated in the through gate 66, the prize detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 635.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604. After that, in step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 66 is executed.

(Prize processing for through)
In the through winning process in step S104, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 66. When the game ball wins the through gate 66 and the character holding memory number SN is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the character holding memory number SN is incremented by 1 and updated in step S103 above. The value of the open random number counter C4 is stored in the first free storage area of the electric service storage area 633 of the RAM 604. After that, the main winning process is completed.

If it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 66, or if it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 66 but the bonus storage number SN has reached the upper limit, the value of the open random number counter C4 is set. The final winning process is completed without storing.

In the through winning process, the display control process of the through gate hold number display unit SS of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, the light emission control process is executed so that the same number of light emitters as the accessory hold storage number SN is lit for the hold number display unit SS for the through gate composed of four light emitters (LEDs).

After executing the winning process for the through in step S104, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed in step S105, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Prize processing for the operating port)
In the winning process for the operating port in step S105, first, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the first operating ball entry portion 62 (first operating port 62a) is determined in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. 1 Judgment is made based on whether or not the winning detection flag for the operating port is stored. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when the game ball receives a detection signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the first operating entry portion 62 (first operating port 62a), the payout is made. A prize ball command for paying out two game balls is set in the control device 181. Then, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that the game ball has won a prize is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side to the first operating ball entry unit 62 (first operating port 62a). As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that a prize has been generated for the first actuating ball entry portion 62 (first actuating port 62a).

After that, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first operation port is updated (1 addition). Subsequently, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the first operating port is not stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 and the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored, the payout control device is used. A prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set in 181. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the second operating ball entry unit 63 (second operating port 63a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that a prize has been generated for the second actuating ball entry portion 63 (second actuating port 63a).

After that, when the hold information is not stored in the second execution area AE2 (that is, when the game round related to the second operation port 63a is not in progress), the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number Information acquisition processing for storing each value of the counter C3 in the second execution area AE2 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the holding function related to the second operating port 63a is not provided, the second operating port 63a is awarded a prize in the situation where the holding information is stored in the second execution area AE2. In the case of a new occurrence, the pending information will not be stored based on the winning.

If the game ball does not win in any of the first actuating ball entry section 62 and the second actuating ball entry section 63, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S209 and S210 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for game rounds such as a change start command, a type command, and a change end command, or a command corresponding to an effect for open / close execution mode is set, it is notified. -Send to the effect control device 143. Further, the output is set for the external terminal board 213 according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game time control process, a hit / fail judgment such as a hit and a distribution judgment of a big hit type are performed, a change display of a symbol is set by the symbol display device 75, and a display for an operation port in the main display unit 81 (main display unit D). Display control of units D1, D2, etc. is performed.

After that, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the like.

In the following step S205, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side actuated ball entry unit 62R is executed. In this electric service support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 by using the information stored in the electric service storage area of the RAM 604, and the electric accessory 71 is opened / closed and through. It controls the display of the gate display unit DS.

In the following step S206, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch condition is provided on condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch control device 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once during the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE. That is, when an irregular striking such as a so-called stop striking is not performed, the firing of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the firing operation is performed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S209, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S210.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, so the power failure processing after step S211 is executed. Specifically, after prohibiting the occurrence of timer interrupt processing in step S211, calculating and saving the RAM determination value in step S212, and prohibiting access to RAM 604 in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off. And continue the infinite loop until the process cannot be executed.

(Game times control process)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 21, the game rotation control process of step S203 will be supplementarily described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game times control process shown in the present embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. do. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S301, the game round control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S301, the game times control process for the game times related to the winning of the first actuating ball entry portion 62 (first actuating port 62a) in step S302 (game corresponding to the first actuating port). The game round control process (second) for the game rounds related to the winning of the second actuated ball entry unit 63 (second actuating port 63a) in step S303 while executing the round control process (control process for the first actuation port). After executing the game times control process corresponding to the operation port, the control process for the second operation port), the main game times control process is terminated. The basic flow of these two control processes is the same. Hereinafter, the control process for the first operating port will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, and then the second operation port control process will be mainly referred to with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. The control process for the working port will be described.

(Control processing for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 18, in the control process for the first operating port, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the game rotation related to the first operating port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D1 for the first operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the definite display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (game rotation information) for the first operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. It is performed by determining whether or not it has been done. The game rotation flag for the first operating port is a flag that is stored when the variable display is started on the display unit D1 for the first operating port, and is erased when the pattern is stopped and displayed and the confirmed display ends. Is.

If it is not during the game rotation related to the first operating port 62a, a negative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, the reserved ball storage area 632 is referred to the total reserved number storage area, and the reserved stored number CRN for the first operating port, which is the number of reserved information stored on hold (specifically, the holding related to the first operating port 62a). It is determined whether or not the number of information) is "0". When the reserved storage number CRN for the first operating port is "0", the game times control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the reserved storage number CRN for the first operating port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the first operating port, first, the reserved storage number CRN for the first operating port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the holding area Ra for the first operating port was moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 9) and stored in each storage area of the holding area Ra for the first working port. Execute the process to shift the data.

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as from the third area to the second area and from the fourth area to the third area. Then, one LED that is lit on the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port is turned off. In this extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port are turned off in order from the lower side.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S404, for the first operating port for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. After executing the fluctuation start processing (variation start processing for the first operating port) of, the game round control processing is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the fluctuation start processing for the first actuating port in step S404 will be described.

(Variation start processing for the first operating port)
In the fluctuation start processing for the first operating port, first, the hit / fail determination processing is executed in step S501. In the hit / fail determination process, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 among the information stored in the first execution area AE1 is the above-mentioned jackpot with reference to the hit / miss table for the first operating port. It is judged whether or not it matches with the numerical information for the special hit and the numerical information for the special hit. If the determination result in step S501 is a big hit result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the information for type determination grasped above is included in any of the information groups corresponding to the first result to the third result. That is, it is specified whether it is included in the information group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot or the information group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot A.

In step S504, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the jackpot result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D1 for the first operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S504, information indicating the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S504, information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the game result of this time is either the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot A is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, when it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation flag is stored, and when it is a 10R probability variation jackpot A, the 10R probability variation flag A is stored.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive jackpots corresponding to the transition to the high-frequency support mode and the number of consecutive jackpots corresponding to the transition to the high-probability mode. Yes (so-called limiter). In the MPU 602, referring to the value of the continuous number counter provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604, whether or not the number of consecutive big hits corresponding to the transition to the high frequency support mode has reached the upper limit according to the result of this big hit. Is determined.

Returning to the description of step S501, if a special hit is obtained by the determination of step S501, a negative determination is made in step S502 and an affirmative determination is made in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, the stop result setting process for the special hit result is executed. Specifically, the stop for the special hit result, in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D1 for the first operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the special hit result, and in step S506, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the special hit result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S506, the special hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the game result this time is the special hit result.

If the determination in step S501 results in a deviation, a negative determination is made in steps S502 and S505, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, the stop result setting process for the disengagement result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the disengagement result is stored in advance in the ROM 603 with the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D1 for the first operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game. It is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the disengagement result, and in step S506, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S506, the disengagement flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the game result this time is the disengagement result.

After executing the setting processing of step S504, step S506, and step S507, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, the variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later. After executing the variation display time setting process in step S508, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S509. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. As described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach generation is different from the variation display time acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach generation, so that the variation starts. Even if the command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the notification / effect control device 143, which is a control device on the sub side, can specify whether or not reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Incidentally, the fluctuation start command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510 to start the variable display of the first operating port display unit D1 in the main display unit 81, and then end the variable starting process for the first operating port. In the process of step S510, the game rotation flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game times (for example, variable display) related to the first operating port 62a are being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress related to the first operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is being executed in the game times related to the first operating port 62a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S405, the process for the first operating port is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S405, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the second operating port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S406, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the fluctuation display time set in step S508. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the variation display process is executed in step S408, and then the control process for the first operating port is terminated. In the variable display process of step S408, the pattern is variablely displayed by performing a process of turning on / off various LEDs constituting the first operating port display unit D1.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S410. In step S410, the variable end process is executed. In the variable end processing, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit D1 for the first operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, a definite display of a pattern corresponding to a lottery result (game result) is executed. Further, the confirmation display flag for the first operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This confirmation display flag is a flag that is erased when the confirmation display is completed, and in the process of step S405, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is being performed based on the presence or absence of the confirmation display flag.

After setting the variable end command in the following step S412, the game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S412 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 executes a process for terminating the effect in the game round based on the reception of the variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 responds to the game result of the game by receiving the variation end command. The combination of the symbols is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently end the effect for the game round without transmitting the variable end command.

Returning to the explanation of step S406, when an affirmative judgment is made in step S406, that is, when it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the second operating port 63a, step S409 is performed. move on. In step S409, the stop pattern rewriting process is executed. Specifically, regardless of whether the game is a big hit result, a special hit result, or a missed result, the stop result (game result) is rewritten as a missed result. That is, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot result corresponding to the second operating port 63a are performed in parallel with the game times related to the first operating port 62a, the game times related to the second operating port 63a are completed first. In addition, the game rounds related to the first operating port 62a are forcibly terminated so as to result in a disengagement. After executing the rewriting process in step S409, each process from step S410 to step S411 is executed, and then the control process for the first actuating port is terminated.

Next, the control process for the second actuating port will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

(Control processing for the second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 20, in the control process for the second operating port, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is being rotated according to the second operating port 63a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D2 for the second operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to the definite display, that is, whether or not the game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game rotation flag (variation display information) for the second operating port is stored (stored) in the game rotation flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. It is performed by determining whether or not it has been done. The game rotation flag for the second operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the display unit D2 for the second operating port, and is erased when the pattern is stopped and displayed and the final display is completed.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the winning of the second operating port 63a has occurred. If a negative determination is made in step S602, the control process for the second operating port is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, the data setting process for the second operating port 63a is executed.

In the data setting process for the second operating port 63a, various information acquired from the lottery counter buffer 631 is set in the second execution area AE2. After performing the data setting process described in detail above, the second operation for starting the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 in step S604. After executing the fluctuation start processing for the mouth (variation start processing for the second operating mouth), the game round control processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the fluctuation start processing for the second actuating port in step S604 will be described.

(Variation start processing for the second operating port)
In the fluctuation start processing for the second operating port, first, the hit / fail determination processing is executed in step S701. In the hit / fail determination process, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, is the above-mentioned jackpot with reference to the hit / miss table for the second operating port. Determine if it matches the numerical information. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, the type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. With reference to the table, it is specified whether the grasped information for type determination is included in the information group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot A or the information group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot B.

In the following step S704, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the jackpot result in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (second operating port display unit D2) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S704, information indicating the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S704, information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the game result this time is either the 10R probability variation jackpot A or the 10R probability variation jackpot B is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, when it is a 10R probability variation jackpot A, the 10R probability variation flag A is stored, and when it is a 10R probability variation jackpot B, the 10R probability variation flag B is stored.

Returning to the description of step S701, if the result of the pass / fail determination is a wrong result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, the stop result setting process for the off result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the disengagement result is stored in advance in the ROM 603 with the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (display unit D2 for the second operating port) of the main display unit 81 in the game. It is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit D are set in the stop result table for the disengagement result, and in step S506, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S506, the disengagement flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 as information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the game result this time is the disengagement result.

After executing the setting process of step S704 and step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. The details of the variable display time setting process will be described later.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S706, the variation start command and the type command are set in step S707. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach generation is different from the variation display time acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach generation. Even if the fluctuation start command does not include the information on whether or not reach has occurred, the notification / effect control device 143, which is the control device on the sub side, can specify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the fluctuation display time. be. In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. The fluctuation start command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S707, the process proceeds to step S708 to start the variable display of the display unit D2 for the second operating port in the main display unit 81, and then end the variable starting process for the second operating port. In the process of step S708, the game rotation flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game times (for example, variable display) related to the second operating port 63a are being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 20, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game is being rotated according to the second operating port 63a, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is being executed in the game times related to the second operating port 63a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, the process for the second operating port is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S605, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special hit result in the game round related to the first operating port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game rounds related to the first operating port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed the fluctuation display time set in step S706. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the variation display process is executed in step S609, and then the second actuation port control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S609, the pattern is variablely displayed by performing a process of turning on / off various LEDs constituting the display unit D2 for the second operating port.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the variable end process is executed. In the variable end processing, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit D2 for the second operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, a definite display of a pattern corresponding to a lottery result (game result) is executed. Further, the confirmation display flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This confirmation display flag is a flag that is erased when the confirmation display is completed, and in the process of step S605, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is being performed based on the presence or absence of the confirmation display flag.

After setting the variable end command in the following step S612, the game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S612 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 executes a process for terminating the effect in the game round based on the reception of the variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / effect control device 143, and the display control device 710 responds to the game result of the game by receiving the variation end command. The combination of the symbols is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 may independently end the effect for the game round without transmitting the variable end command.

Returning to the explanation of step S606 and step S607, when an affirmative judgment is made in any of steps S606 and S607, that is, the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result or the special deviation result is stopped in the game round related to the second operating port 63a. If it is time to display the display, the process proceeds to step S610. In step S610, the stop pattern rewriting process is executed. Specifically, regardless of whether the game is a big hit result or a missed result, the stop result (game result) is rewritten as a missed result. That is, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot result corresponding to the second operating port 63a are performed in parallel with the game times related to the second operating port 63a, the game times related to the first operating port 62a are completed first. In addition, the game rounds related to the second operating port 63a are forcibly terminated so as to result in a disengagement. After executing the rewriting process of step S610, each process of step S611 to S612 is executed, and then the control process for the second actuating port is terminated.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 26. As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal game state in which the game progresses based on the entry into the operating ports 62a and 63a and the special game state in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened (opening / closing execution mode). ) And are provided. As described above, regarding the normal game state, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode, the first normal game state, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the electric accessory 71. The support mode is composed of the second normal game state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the low frequency support mode. The switching between the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state is performed via the special gaming state corresponding to the result.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the game round (detailed, confirmed display) is completed. If it is not the timing when the game round is finished, the main game state transition process is finished as it is.

If the game round is completed, more specifically, if the preset stop display time (confirmed display time) has elapsed after the variable display is completed, the process proceeds to step S803, and this time. It is determined whether or not the game result of the game times (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the above-mentioned 2R probability variation flag, 10R probability variation flag A, 10R probability variation flag B, and special hit flag is stored in the RAM 604. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening / closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S804. In the start processing, first, the opening waiting time (starting standby time) for making the variable winning devices 64, 65 stand by without starting the opening of the variable winning devices 64, 65 for the opening of the open / close execution mode is set. do. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

The waiting time for opening (opening time) in this embodiment differs depending on the type of hit. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening when the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot is reached during the first normal gaming state is 7 sec, and when the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot is achieved during the second normal gaming state. The waiting time for the opening is 3 sec, and the waiting time for the opening when the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot is reached during the third normal gaming state is 3 sec. On the other hand, in the case of a special hit result, the waiting time for the opening is shorter than that regardless of the gaming state, more specifically, 8 msec.

In the following step S805, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round number counter RC provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the jackpot result of this time is a 2R probability variation jackpot, "2" is set in the round number counter RC, and if the jackpot result of this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot, "10" is set in the round number counter RC. "Is set. The round number counter RC is subtracted each time the round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the current special gaming state ends. After executing the setting process of step S806, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 is deleted in step S807.

Returning to the description of step S805, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, in the case of a special gaming state triggered by the special hit result, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, the second winning mode flag (flag for low frequency winning mode) is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. After that, in step S809, "1" is set in the round number counter. In the subsequent processing, it is determined that the special game state this time corresponds to the special hit result based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the opening command setting process is performed. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and can control various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. .. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. In the display control device 710, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 143, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811, and the game state transition process is completed. In the external signal setting process of step S811, it is determined whether or not any of the above-mentioned various jackpot flags and special hit flags is stored in the RAM 604, and if any of the flags is stored, the game hall side. A signal indicating that a big hit or a special hit has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC). By receiving this external signal, it is grasped that the management control device has shifted to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode).

Returning to the description of step S801, if the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in the step S801, and the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S813.

Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 to 25.

(Opening and closing of the winning opening)
As shown in FIG. 23, in the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902 to execute the first opening / closing process. The first opening / closing process is a process executed when the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot result, that is, the first special gaming state.

(First opening / closing process)
As shown in FIG. 24, in the first opening / closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first variable winning device 64 (first large winning opening 331) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 451 of the first variable winning device 64. If the first large winning opening 331 is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the first opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time, interval time (inter-round interval time), etc. of the first large winning opening 331, and is used every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed. The value is subtracted by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the first opening / closing process is terminated.

When the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the closing condition setting process corresponding to the first variable winning device 64 (first large winning opening 331) is performed ( As the setting process for opening), the processes of steps S1004 to S1005 are executed. Specifically, in step S1004, "4000" (corresponding to 8 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in subsequent step S1005, "10" is set in the winning counter PC.

In the following step S1006, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1007, and the opening process of the first variable winning device 64 (first large winning opening 331) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set to the driving state (excited state) in order to open the first large winning opening 331. When the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by the 2R probability variation jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S1006 and the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, the opening process of the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341) is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to the driving state (excited state) in order to open the second large winning opening 341.

After that, the process proceeds to step S1009, the release command is set, and the first opening / closing process is completed. The release command includes information indicating the release target (first variable winning device 64 or second variable winning device 65), and the set release command is in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 16). , Is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143. The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the reception of this release command, and can control various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. ..

Returning to the description of step S1001, when it is determined in step S1001 that the first variable winning device 64 (first big winning opening 331) or the second variable winning device 65 (second big winning opening 341) is open. To step S1010. In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1011 and whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (first large winning opening 331 or second large winning opening 341) that was the target of opening. Is determined based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor (detection sensor 391d, 391e) attached to the variable winning device (first variable winning device 64 or second variable winning device 65).

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S1012. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 143, and the notification / effect control device 143 can change the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1012, the process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1013, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". finish.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1014, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S1010 (that is, it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". In the case of), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, the variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 451, 461) is not driven in order to close the variable winning device (first variable winning device 64 or variable winning device 65) to be opened in step S1019. It is in a state (non-excited state).

In the following step S1016, the round number counter RC is updated. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the round number counter RC is performed. Keep the value of "0".

After that, in step S1017, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1017, the process proceeds to step S1018, and "750" (corresponding to 1.5 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1.

After executing the process of step S1018, the close command is set in step S1019, and the first open / close process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closed command based on the reception of the closed command, and can control various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. ing.

Returning to the description of step S1017, if it is determined in step S1017 that the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1020. In step S1020, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S1021, after setting the ending command, the first opening / closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The notification / effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending command based on the reception of this ending command, and can control various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. ing.

Returning to the description of FIG. 23, if an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the second opening / closing process of step S903 is executed. Hereinafter, the second opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Second opening / closing process)
In the second opening / closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 461 of the second variable winning device 65. If the second big winning opening 341 is not open, the opening process of the second variable winning device 65 (second big winning opening 341) is executed in step S1102. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 461 is set to the driving state (excited state) in order to open the second large winning opening 341.

After that, the processes of steps S1103 to S1104 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in the subsequent step S1104, "6" is set in the winning counter PC.

Returning to the description of step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". It is determined whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106, and a detection signal from the detection sensor 391d attached to the second variable winning device 65 indicates whether or not the game ball has won the second big winning opening 341. Judgment is based on.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S1107. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 143, and the notification / effect control device 143 can change the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". do.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1109, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S1105 (that is, it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". In the case of), it means that the conditions for closing the large winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is put into a non-driving state (non-excited state) in order to close the second variable winning device 65 (second large winning opening 341).

In the following step S1111, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

Then, in step S1112, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 17).

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S814, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, after executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S816, this game End the state transition process. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, first, in step S1201, the hit that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the hit corresponding to the high probability mode, that is, the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and the 10R probability variation. It is determined whether or not it is one of the jackpot B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, the probability variation continuous number counters provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 are updated. Specifically, the value of the probability variation continuous count counter is incremented by "1".

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the hit that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the hit corresponding to the high frequency support mode, that is, the 10R probability variation jackpot A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, the time saving continuous number counters provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 are updated. Specifically, the value of the time saving continuous number counter is incremented by "1".

After that, the process proceeds to step S1205, and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving continuous number counter after the update is the first reference value stored in the ROM 603. If a negative determination is made in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the value of the above-mentioned probability variation continuous number counter is the second reference value stored in the ROM 603. If a negative determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207.

In the present embodiment, the first reference value is "10 times" and the second reference value is "40 times", and the second reference value is larger than the first reference value. The first reference value and the second reference value may be arbitrarily changed as long as such a magnitude relationship is maintained. Even when such a change is made, it is preferable that the first reference value and the second reference value are both "twice" or more.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the hit that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is either the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208, and the process of shifting to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, the high probability mode flag and the low frequency support mode flag are set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent normal game state, the lottery mode for winning / failing lottery becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 becomes the low frequency support mode. After that, in step S1209, various flags for advancing the open / close execution mode (for example, a winning mode flag, a jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and this transition process is completed.

On the other hand, if the hit that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the 10R probability variation jackpot A, a negative determination is made in step S1207 and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the transition process to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent normal game state, the lottery mode for winning / failing lottery becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 becomes the high frequency support mode. After that, in step S1209, various flags for advancing the open / close execution mode (for example, a winning mode flag, a jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and this transition process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, forcible switching of the gaming state may occur by using the above-mentioned time-saving continuous number counter and probability variation continuous number counter. That is, even if the 10R probability variation jackpot A corresponding to the transition to the high frequency support mode is obtained, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode (for example, the third normal gaming state) can be entered, or the high probability mode can be obtained. Even if the 2R probability variation jackpot A and the 10R probability variation jackpot B corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode are entered, the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is performed. There is. Hereinafter, the control for realizing such a behavior will be described.

Returning to the description of step S1205, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the value of the time saving continuous number counter is the first reference value, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the time saving continuous number counter is reset. Specifically, the value of the time saving continuous number counter is cleared to 0. After that, in step S1208, the transition process to the third normal gaming state is executed, and in step S1209, various flags for progressing the open / close execution mode (for example, the winning mode flag, the jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and the main transition is performed. End the process.

Returning to the description of step S1206, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is the second reference value, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, the probability variation continuous number counter is reset. Specifically, the value of the probability variation continuous count counter is cleared to 0. After that, in step S1213, the transition process to the first normal gaming state is executed. Specifically, the low probability mode flag and the low frequency support mode flag are set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent normal game state, the lottery mode for winning / failing lottery becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 becomes the low frequency support mode. After that, in step S1209, various flags for advancing the open / close execution mode (for example, a winning mode flag, a jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and this transition process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1201, if the opportunity to shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a special hit, a negative determination is made in the step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1214. In step S1214, the process of returning to the game state before the shift to the open / close execution mode is executed. That is, when the special hit this time occurs during the first normal gaming state, the process of returning to the first normal gaming state is executed, and the special hit this time occurs during the second normal gaming state. In that case, the process of returning to the second normal game state is executed, and when the special hit this time occurs during the third normal game state, the process of returning to the third normal game state is executed. After that, in step S1209, various flags for advancing the open / close execution mode (for example, a winning mode flag, a jackpot flag, etc.) are erased, and this transition process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29, the electric service support process executed in step S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 16) will be described. 27 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process, FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram comparing the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the electric service opening / closing process.

(Processing for electric service support)
In the electric service support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operating port 62aR is switched to the open state and is cleared when the electric accessory 71 is returned to the closed state.

If the supporting flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 is won, and is cleared when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1303, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1304, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, after setting the off display and setting the timer counter TC2 to "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec), the main electric service support process is terminated. .. By setting the off display, the variable display of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed, and this off display is continued for 0.5 sec (FIG. 29). reference).

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus storage number SN is larger than "0". If the value of the number of stored items SN is "0", the process for supporting the main electric service is terminated as it is. When the value of the number of stored items SN is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If the high frequency support mode is in progress, a positive determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined by lottery (support lottery or open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the electric service holding area Rc of the electric service storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the third execution area AE3 and the pass / fail table storage area of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the high frequency support mode stored in 621. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2. The timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is continued until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, for 1 sec (see FIG. 28).

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1308 is the winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1310, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

If the low frequency support mode is in progress, a negative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined by lottery (support lottery or open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the electric service holding area Rc of the electric service storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the third execution area AE3 and the pass / fail table storage area of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the low frequency support mode stored in 621. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "1000" to "2500" (that is, corresponding to 2 to 5 sec) are set in the timer counter TC2. After that, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is continued until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 2 to 5 sec (see FIG. 28).

In the following step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1311 is the winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1313, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

The probability of winning support in the high-frequency support mode (details 249/250) is higher than the probability of winning support in the low-frequency support mode (details 125/250), and high-frequency support. The mode is given preferential treatment.

Returning to the description of step S1302 in FIG. 27, when the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1314, and the value of the timer counter TC2 is set. It is determined whether or not it is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the pattern variation display on the through-gate display unit DS is being performed, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. When the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the hit display is set in step S1315. As a result, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. In the following step S1316, the supporting flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635, the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 is cleared, and then the main electric service support process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, if the supported flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317 to open and close the electric accessory 71. After executing the electric function opening / closing process for control, the main electric function support process is terminated. Hereinafter, the electric function opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

(Electrical function opening / closing process)
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open is determined by whether or not the drive unit 332 is in the drive state. If the electric accessory 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the number of winnings after opening the right operating port 62aR to which the electric accessory 71 is attached reaches the upper limit (“10” in the present embodiment). Determine if it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, a closing process for switching (returning) the electric accessory 71 to the closed state is performed. After that, in step S1405, the supported flags stored in the various flag storage areas 635 are erased, and the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1401, if the electric accessory 71 is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401 and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TC2 is “0”. If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the timer counter TC2 is "0", the opening process for switching the electric accessory 71 to the open state is executed in step S1407.

After that, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. In the high frequency support mode, after setting "750" (corresponding to 1.5 sec) in the timer counter TC2 in step S1409, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, after setting "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec) in the timer counter TC2 in step S1410, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated.

(Relationship between game status and variable display time)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the entry into the first actuating port 62a and the second actuating port 63a, and the pattern in the game round is obtained based on the acquired hold information. The configuration is such that the variable display to the final display of the symbol are executed. Here, the variable display time of the pattern or the pattern is set according to the game state and the lottery result. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33, the configuration related to the setting of the variation display time and the like (variation display time setting in the variation start processing for the first operating port and the variation display time setting in the variation start processing for the second operating port). Processing) will be supplementarily explained. FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing a variation display time setting process (variation display time setting process for the first actuation port) in the variation start process for the first actuation port, and FIG. 30B is a variation start for the first actuation port. A flowchart showing the variation display time setting process (variation display time setting process for the second operating port) in the process, FIGS. 31 to 33 are schematic views showing the relationship between the gaming state and the variation display time.

(Variable display time setting process for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 30A, in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port, first, in step S1501, whether or not the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is performed. To judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1502, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Then, the variable display time is set according to the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first operating port in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning / failing lottery, the presence / absence of reach, and the like.

Regarding the variable display time, when comparing the jackpot result and the missed result, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter, and even in the case of the missed result, the reach display does not occur (completely missed). In the case of), it is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. FIG. 31 (a1) exemplifies the variable display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information is set. When the number is "2", either "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "3" or "4", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time.

As shown in FIG. 33 (a1), the variation display time in the case of a special hit in the first normal gaming state is basically the same as in the case of the deviation. However, in the present embodiment, if a special hit is made during the first normal game state, the game rotation effect ends without going through the reach display.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a1), for the variable display time in the case of a big hit in the first normal gaming state, any one of "20 to 40 sec" is set regardless of the number of stored information on hold. To. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the out-of-reach (see FIG. 31 (a1)). If it is a big hit, a relatively long time is likely to be set in the range, and if it is out of the range, a relatively short time is likely to be set in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach display having a short variable display time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30A, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the player is in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1504, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the second normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the second normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one regardless of the number of stored information on hold. Specifically, in the case of deviation in the second normal game state, "1200 sec" is set as the variable display time (see FIG. 31 (a2)), which is the same as the first normal game state. The variable display time is longer than that.

Further, in the case of a big hit or a special hit in the second normal gaming state, "600 sec" is set as the variable display time (see FIGS. 32 (a2) and 33 (a2)). That is, it is configured so that the variable display time is shorter in the case of a big hit or a special hit than in the case of a deviation.

The details will be described later, but in the second normal gaming state, by launching the gaming ball to the right route formed in the gaming area PE, the game can be favorably played by the player as compared with the case of aiming at the left route. It will proceed. Most of the game balls launched to the right route win a prize in the second operating port 63a. Then, in the second normal gaming state, the variation display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a becomes extremely long, so that the second game times related to the first operating port 62a are being executed. A large number of game times related to the operating port 63a can be executed, and the game proceeds mainly based on the hold information related to the second operating port 63a.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503 of FIG. 30A, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the player is in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the third normal game state setting process is executed in step S1506, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, in the case of a loss or a special hit in the second normal game state, the selection candidate of the variable display time is limited to one regardless of the number of stored information on hold. .. Specifically, "0.1 sec" is set as the variable display time for each of the game times that are out of order or a special hit in the third normal game state (FIGS. 31 (a3) and FIG. 33 (a3)). The variable display time = "0.1 sec" is not compatible with the reach display, and if it is a special hit in the third normal game state, it means that it is a special hit without going through the reach display. Be specified. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the third normal gaming state, "5 sec" is set as the variable display time (see FIG. 32 (a3)). In addition, the variable display time = "5 sec" is not compatible with the reach display, and when a big hit occurs in the third normal game state, it is clearly stated that the big hit does not go through the reach display. To.

Incidentally, in the game times that trigger the transition to the second normal game state in the third normal game state (that is, the game times that become the 10R probability variation jackpot A), the variable display time is the first normal game state or the second normal game. Set a variable display time (for example, "300 sec") longer than the variable display time when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained in the state, and delay (delay) the transition from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state. It is also possible to configure it.

In the first normal game state and the third normal game state, "1 sec" is set as the final display time of the symbol on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75, and the second In the normal gaming state, "0.5 sec" is set as the final display time of the symbol on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75.

(Variable display time setting process for the second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 30B, in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port, first, in step S1601, whether or not the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is performed. To judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1602, and then the variable display time setting process ends.

In the first normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time. The variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port is a table different from the variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port. be.

In the first normal gaming state, the variable display time is set regardless of various conditions such as the number of holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port in the holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 and the presence or absence of reach occurrence. The selection candidates are limited to one. Specifically, in the case of deviation in the first normal gaming state, "1200 sec" is set as the variable display time (see FIG. 31 (b1)). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the first normal gaming state, "600 sec" is set as the variable display time (see FIG. 32 (b1)).

Returning to the description of FIG. 30B, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the player is in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1604, and then the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the second normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time. The variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port is a table different from the variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port. be.

In the second normal game state setting process, when the time is off in the second normal game state, “1 sec” is set as the variable display time (see FIG. 31 (b2)). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the first normal gaming state, "5 sec" is set as the variable display time (see FIG. 32 (b2)). The variable display time = "5 sec" is not compatible with the reach display, and when a big hit is made in the second normal game state, it is clearly indicated that the big hit is made without going through the reach display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30B, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, after executing the setting process for the third normal game state (setting process for the third normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the third normal game state setting process, a table corresponding to the current game time is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. And set the variable display time. The variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the second operating port is a table different from the variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the first operating port. be.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, "1200 sec" is set as the variable display time when the time is out of the third normal game state (see FIG. 31 (b3)). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the first normal gaming state, "600 sec" is set as the variable display time (see FIG. 32 (b3)).

In the first normal game state and the third normal game state, "1 sec" is set as the final display time of the symbol on the display unit D2 for the second operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75, and the second In the normal gaming state, "0.5 sec" is set as the final display time of the symbol on the display unit D2 for the second operating port and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75.

In the present embodiment, the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed in parallel, but as described above, each normal game state is the first. By providing a large difference between the variable display time of the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the variable display time of the game times related to the second operating port 63a, the main target for advancing the game is switched. ing. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, the game progresses so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a become the main, and in the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the second operating port 63a. A configuration is realized in which the game progresses so as to be the main game, and in the third normal game state, the game progresses so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a become the main game.

In addition, in the game rounds related to the first operating port 62a, there is a 1/2 chance that a special hit will be made. Although the game ball launched to the right route is configured to be able to enter the second operating port 63a, in the third normal gaming state, the game times related to the second operating port 63a are in progress. When the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display unit D1 for the first operating port, the game is forcibly terminated so that the game times related to the second operating port 63a are disengaged. As a result, in the third normal gaming state, a configuration is preferably realized in which the gaming progresses so that the gaming times related to the first operating port 62a are the main.

(Flow of the game)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 34 to 36. FIG. 34 is a block diagram (game flow) showing the flow of the game, FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram comparing the game states, and FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram showing the change of the holding ball with the progress of the game. In the following description, FIG. 34 will be the center, and FIGS. 12, 35 and 36 will be referred to as appropriate.

(1st normal game state)
In the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a prize is generated in the first operating port 62a (specifically, the lower operating port 62aL) arranged in the game area PE (left route). , Jackpot and special win lottery will be executed. In the present embodiment, the first normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a difference is provided so that the advantage of the player is the lowest among the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state.

In the first normal game state, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is associated with the game times related to the first operating port 62a (in other words, in the central portion of the display screen 75a). The displayed symbol is not associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a). In the first normal gaming state, the game rotation effect (reach display, etc.) corresponding to the game times related to the first operating port 62a is executed using those symbols.

If the game ball is launched toward the right route during the first normal game state, or if a prize is awarded to the through gate 66, a warning sound is output from the speaker unit 29 and the display screen is displayed. In the central part of 75a, "Please return to left-handed" is displayed as a message urging the player to launch the game ball to the left route.

When various big hits are made during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). As described above, in the first normal gaming state, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 10R probability variation jackpot A are provided as jackpots based on the winning of the first operating port 62a, and the division between the two in the first normal gaming state. The 2R probability variation jackpot is 66.5%, and the 10R probability variation jackpot A is 33.5% (see FIG. 12).

If the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached during the first normal game state, the process shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special game state. The second normal gaming state is a gaming state set so that the player has the highest advantage among the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained during the first normal game state, the process shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the first special game state. The advantage of the player is the first normal game state <third normal game state <second normal game state, but the difference in the advantage between the third normal game state and the first normal game state is the third. It is smaller than the difference in the advantage between the normal game state and the second normal game state and the difference in the advantage between the first normal game state and the second normal game state, and the difference is suppressed to be extremely small. Has been done.

(Second normal game state)
In the second normal gaming state, the variable display time of the pattern (special figure 1) on the display unit D1 for the first operating port becomes long (1200 sec or 600 sec), and the pattern (special figure) on the display unit D2 for the second operating port becomes long. The fluctuation display time of 2) is short (1 sec or 5 sec). That is, by shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed between the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the display unit D2 for the second operating port (FIG. FIG. See 35). During the second normal gaming state, by launching the game ball to the right route, the game ball wins in either the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a, but the display unit for the first operating port As the variation display time in D1 becomes longer, the game progresses so that the game times related to the second operating port 63a become the main.

In the second normal game state, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a. That is, in the second normal gaming state, the gaming rotation effect corresponding to the gaming rotation related to the second operating port 63a is executed at the central portion of the display screen 75a. In other words, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game times related to the first operating port 62a.

If a big hit occurs in the second normal game state, the game shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). As described above, in the second normal gaming state, only the 10R probability variable jackpot A is provided as the jackpot based on the winning of the second operating port 63a (see FIG. 12). That is, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the 10R probability variation jackpot A → the first special gaming state → the second normal gaming state loops.

As described above, the pachinko machine shown in the present embodiment is equipped with two types of limiters (probability change limiter and time saving limiter) using two continuous count counters. In the second normal gaming state, the continuous number counters are updated when the loop is repeated. Specifically, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is a jackpot corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and by becoming the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the value of the time saving continuous count counter and the probability variation continuous count The values of the counters will be added by "1" respectively.

When the value of the time saving continuous number counter reaches the first reference value (corresponding to the number of consecutive times = 10 times), the time saving limiter operates. As a result, the state shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode through the first special gaming state, and the loop ends. At this time, the value of the time saving continuous number counter is cleared to 0. In the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, when the value of the time saving continuous number counter reaches the first reference value, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter becomes the second reference value. (Equivalent to 40 consecutive times) is not reached. Then, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is inherited from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state without being cleared to 0.

In addition, when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is performed, the 10R probability variation jackpot A including the 10R probability variation jackpot A that triggered the transition will be consecutive 10 times, and approximately 12,000 prize balls will be awarded. Can be expected to be acquired. That is, the transition to the second normal gaming state greatly increases the number of balls held by the player (see FIG. 36).

(Third normal game state)
The transition route to the third normal game state is roughly divided into two, a 2R probability variation jackpot in the first normal game state and an operation of the time saving limiter in the second normal game state.

In the third normal gaming state, the variable display time of the pattern (special figure 1) on the display unit D1 for the first operating port is short (0.1 sec or 5 sec), and the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port (0.1 sec or 5 sec). The variation display time of the special figure 2) is short (1200 sec or 600 sec). That is, when the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is performed, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed (see FIG. 35). That is, in the third normal game state, when the game ball is launched toward the right route as in the second normal game state, the game proceeds so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a become the main. It will be. Incidentally, when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is performed, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is maintained.

Here, with the transition to the third normal gaming state, the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. As a result, the probability of winning the first operating port 62a when the game ball is launched to the right route is lower than that in the high frequency support mode. However, most of the game times related to the first operating port 62a are special hits, and the second variable winning device 65 is opened.

During the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls are guided to the first operating port 62a by the electric accessory 71, and the second variable winning device 65 located on the downstream side of the first operating port 62a (right operating port 62aR). The flow of the game ball to is suppressed. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, a certain amount of game balls pass through the electric accessory 71 and flow down toward the second variable winning device 65, and about one game ball is concerned with one opening. It is set to win a prize in the second variable winning device 65. As a result, the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is alleviated.

Further, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained in the third normal game state, the process shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). The 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and after the transition to the third normal gaming state, the 2R probability variation jackpot → the first special while sandwiching the second special gaming state triggered by the special hit. Game state → The third normal game state will loop. Here, in the third normal gaming state, the breakdown of the case where a big hit is obtained by winning the first operating port 62a is that the 2R probability variable jackpot is 99.8% and the 10R probability variable jackpot A is 0.2%. There is. That is, most jackpots are 2R probability variable jackpots. Then, by the intervention of the second special gaming state, the player can continue the game while suppressing the decrease of the possessed ball by firing the gaming ball to the right route. Further, in the second normal game state, the jackpot probability is 10 times that in the first normal game state, and a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained by the 2R probability variable jackpot. In general, in the third normal game state, by continuing to launch the game ball toward the right route, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held to almost 0 (see FIG. 36).

In the third normal game state, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is associated with the game times related to the first operating port 62a. That is, in the third normal gaming state, the gaming rotation effect corresponding to the gaming rotation related to the first operating port 62a is executed in the central portion of the display screen 75a. In other words, the symbol displayed in the central portion of the display screen 75a is not associated with the game times related to the second operating port 63a.

In the third normal game state, since all the jackpots correspond to the high probability mode, the above-mentioned time-saving continuous number counter is not updated and is maintained at 0. On the other hand, for the probability variation continuous number counter, "1" is added every time the probability variation jackpot is reached by the above loop. If the value of the probability variation continuous count counter does not reach the second reference value (corresponding to the number of consecutive times = 40 times), the loop is continued, and the value of the probability variation continuous count counter is the above second reference value (continuous). When the number of times = 40 times) is reached, the state shifts to the first normal gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state.

Although the probability is extremely low, if the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached before the probability variation limiter by the probability variation continuous number counter is activated, the process shifts to the second normal gaming state. Also in this case, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is inherited from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state. Therefore, when the state shifts from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, it depends on whether or not the difference between the value of the probability variation continuous number counter and the second reference value exceeds the first reference value. , The subsequent behavior will change significantly.

Specifically, when the difference between the value of the continuous number counter for probability variation and the value of the second reference value exceeds the first reference value, the 10R probability variation jackpot that triggered the transition to the second normal gaming state. The 10R probability variation jackpot A including A will be generated 10 times in total, which will be a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held again. On the other hand, when the difference between the value of the probability variation continuous count counter and the value of the second reference value is less than the first reference value, the probability variation limiter is set before the time saving limiter is activated. It will operate, and after increasing the number of balls held to some extent, it will return to the first normal gaming state. That is, when returning from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the stay in the third normal gaming state may be shorter than that at the time of the first transition to the third normal gaming state.

Even when the value of the time saving continuous number counter reaches the first reference value and the value of the probability variation continuous number counter reaches the second reference value, the state shifts from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state. It will be.

Next, the relationship between the opportunity to shift to the third normal gaming state and the period of stay in the third normal gaming state will be supplementarily described. When the time saving limiter is activated after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state and the transition to the third normal gaming state is performed, the probability variation continuous count counter is already related to the time reduction continuous count counter. It means that the count is advanced by the amount of the first reference value. That is, the "remaining number of times" until the probability change limiter is activated = "second reference value"-"first reference". On the other hand, when a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the first normal gaming state, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is added by the amount of the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the third normal gaming state is started. Therefore, the "remaining number of times" until the probability change limiter is activated = "second reference value" -1.

As described above, the first reference value is greater than 1. For this reason, the case of shifting to the third normal game state triggered by the 2R probability variation jackpot during the first normal game state is more than the case of shifting to the third normal game state due to the operation of the time saving limiter. The period of stay in the state, that is, the degree of expectation of promotion to the second normal gaming state is high.

Here, in the third normal game state, since the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed as compared with the first normal game state, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment. And, although the third normal game state is generally more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, the breakdown of the jackpot that shifts to the second normal game state in the third normal game state. Is extremely small. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the jackpot probability is 1/300 and the breakdown of the 10R probability variation jackpot A is 335/1000, and in the third normal gaming state, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the 10R probability variation jackpot. The breakdown of A is 2/1000. That is, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot A by one lottery is 0.112% in the first normal game state and 0.007% in the third normal game state. The player can select whether to play the game in the third normal game state with an emphasis on suppressing investment, or not to play the game in the third normal game state with an emphasis on time efficiency.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the staying time of the upper loop section consisting of the second normal gaming state and the special gaming state and the staying time of the lower loop section consisting of the third normal gaming state and the special gaming state will be described. do.

The average time required from the first normal game state to the third normal game state via the second normal game state is that the game ball is continuously (uninterrupted) fired toward the right route. If so, it is set to be "30 minutes". On the other hand, the average time required from when the limiter by the time saving counter operates to shift to the third normal gaming state to when the limiter by the probability variation continuous number counter operates and shifts to the first normal gaming state, that is, The average required time from the second gaming state to the transition to the first gaming state via the third gaming state is also set to be "30 minutes". That is, the average staying time of the upper loop section (second normal gaming state to special gaming state) in which the number of balls held can be greatly increased, and the lower loop section (third gaming state to special) in which the increase or decrease of the balls held is suppressed. The average staying time (in the game state) is the same. In this way, the average stay time in the lower loop section is set longer so that the average stay time in the lower loop section is not shorter than the average stay time in the upper loop section, and the upper loop section and the upper loop section are set longer. By interposing a lower loop section between and, after a large number of balls are ejected in the upper loop section, the ball moves to the upper loop section again and a large number of balls are ejected to some extent. It is possible to secure an interval.

In order to make the third gaming state function as a suppressing means for suppressing excessive ball ejection, it is not preferable to give the impression that the game is simply delayed due to the presence of the third gaming state. In this respect, in the present embodiment, during the third game state, 2R probability variation big hits and special hits occur frequently, so that the monotonicity of the game is suppressed and the above concerns are dispelled.

In the case of transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state without going through the second normal gaming state, the staying time in the third normal gaming state is about 40 minutes. During this time, the game can be advanced with extremely little investment. By giving preferential treatment to the staying time in the third normal gaming state, which functions as a chance zone in this way, over the case of passing through the second normal gaming state, the player's willingness to play, which did not reach the 10R probability variation jackpot A, is rapidly increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the third normal gaming state, the probability of transition to the second normal gaming state is lower than the probability of transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, but the decrease in the number of balls held is kept extremely small. In that respect, it is given preferential treatment over the first normal gaming state. After paying out a large amount of prize balls in the second normal game state, by temporarily shifting to the third normal game state, it is possible to prevent the change in the ball held in a short time from becoming excessively large. This is preferable in improving the soundness of the game.

In the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a and the winning of the second operating port 63a is given preferential treatment. In this second normal game state, the game progresses so that the game times related to the second operating port 63a become the main, and the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained by the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a. The value of the time-saving continuous count counter (the number of consecutive jackpots that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode) and the value of the probability variation continuous count counter (the number of consecutive jackpots that triggers the transition to the high-probability mode) are updated respectively. Will be done. Here, when the number of consecutive times stored by the time-saving continuous number counter (the number of consecutive big hits that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode) reaches the first reference value (specifically, 10 times), the frequency is low. The second reference value (details) is the number of consecutive times (the number of consecutive big hits that triggers the transition to the high probability mode) stored by the probability variation continuous number counter after shifting to the third game state, which is the game state corresponding to the support mode. When it reaches 40 times), it shifts to the first gaming state which is the gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. That is, the development of the subsequent game changes greatly depending on which of the two types of limiters (time-saving limiter and probability-changing limiter) operates. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, the first reference value (10 times) is less than the second reference value (40 times), so basically the time-saving limiter is easier to operate than the probability variation limiter. It has become. That is, the transition destination from the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode is likely to be the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. Both the 2nd normal game state and the 3rd normal game state correspond to the high probability mode, and the chance of becoming a big hit even after the transition (demotion) to the 3rd game state is the same as the 2nd normal game state. It is maintained to be. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonization of the game in the third gaming state, which is the transition destination from the second gaming state.

When the time saving limiter is activated to shift from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is inherited from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. .. In the third normal gaming state, the game progresses so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a become the main, and if a big hit is obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a, the game proceeds. Most are configured to be 2R probable jackpots. The 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, the value of the probability variation continuous count counter is updated. Then, the special gaming state and the third normal gaming state loop until the value of the probability variation continuous number counter reaches the second reference value (40 times). If the time-saving limiter and the probability-changing limiter are configured to operate in stages in this way, the above-mentioned diversification of games can be suitably realized.

The main transition route to the second normal gaming state is stipulated to be the 10R probability variation jackpot A in the first normal gaming state, but in the first normal gaming state, the time saving limiter (number of continuous time saving) is specified. Both the counter value) and the probability change limiter (value of the probability change continuous number counter) are reset (cleared to 0). That is, when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is performed by the above main transition route, the value of the time saving continuous number counter and the value of the probability variation continuous number counter are the same (both are "1"). ), And basically the time saving limiter operates before the probability change limiter. As a result, it is easy to increase the interval until returning to the upper loop between the second gaming state and the special gaming state, and to suppress the continuous occurrence of a large number of balls by the upper loop in a short period of time.

Further, in the third normal gaming state, the game proceeds so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a become the main as described above, but in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a, the probability is extremely low. Although there is, it can be a 10R probability variation jackpot A that triggers a transition to the second normal gaming state (return trigger). The value of the probability variation continuous number counter is inherited from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, while the value of the time saving continuous number counter is "0" when returning from the third normal gaming state. Therefore, when the third normal gaming state is restored to the second normal gaming state, the probability change limiter may be activated before the time saving limiter is activated. In other words, the 2R probability variation jackpot in the third normal game state makes a difference in which limiter operates first depending on how much the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is added. As a result, the monotonicization of the game is preferably suppressed.

In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the game shifts to the second normal game state, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is continuous in most of the cases, and a large number of balls are ejected. Then, when the number of consecutive times of the 10R probability variation jackpot A reaches the upper limit and the time saving limiter is activated, the game shifts to the third normal game state, and in the third normal game state, the game aims to return to the second normal game state. Is done. Here, although the third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state, the transition to the most advantageous second normal gaming state is the first normal gaming state. Is more difficult than. Specifically, when compared in one game, the probability of transitioning from the first normal game state to the second normal game state is about 1/896, whereas from the third normal game state. The probability of shifting to the second normal gaming state is approximately 1/15000 (see FIGS. 10 to 12). Furthermore, in the third normal gaming state, the number of times (the number of jackpots) that can be challenged to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, which is the trigger for the transition to the second normal gaming state, is also limited by the probability variation limiter. Before that, the condition for transitioning to the first normal gaming state can be satisfied. Even in consideration of this point, the third normal gaming state is treated colder than the first normal gaming state in the transition condition to the second normal gaming state. As described above, if the configuration is such that the transition to the first normal gaming state is performed after the third normal gaming state in which the transition to the second normal gaming state is difficult is made, it is possible to prevent the upper loop from being excessively continuous. This is preferable in order to suppress, for example, an excessive increase in gambling (for example, an excessive number of balls in a short period of time) caused by the creation of a large number of balls.

Since both the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state correspond to the high probability mode, even if the second normal gaming state is demoted to the third normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a big hit itself does not decrease. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the tempo, which becomes a big hit with the progress of the game, from becoming slow due to the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give the impression that the game is unnecessarily delayed in the configuration of shifting to the first normal game state via the third normal game state.

As described above, the third normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode, and is more likely to be a big hit than the first normal game state. After the transition to the third normal gaming state, the monotonicization of the game is suppressed by the loop between the special gaming state and the third gaming state. Further, in the third normal game state, by continuing to launch the game ball toward the right route, a special game state triggered by the special hit is generated in addition to the special game state triggered by the 2R probability variation jackpot. As a result, the chances of winning the variable winning devices 64 and 65 increase as compared with the first normal gaming state, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. When the third normal gaming state is intervened in the process of returning from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, there is a concern that the player may be given the impression that the existence of the third normal gaming state is troublesome. However, during the 3rd normal game state, 2R probability variation jackpots and special hits occur more frequently, and the base (the number of game balls fired during the unit time) is higher than that of the 1st normal game state. By increasing the ratio of the number), the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed.

If the player immediately returns to the first normal gaming state immediately after shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, there is a high possibility that the second normal gaming state will be re-shifted (re-promoted) in a short span. .. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball ejection. Although it is possible to suppress excessive ball ejection by lowering the advantage in the second normal game state, if the difference in the advantage between the first normal game state and the third normal game state becomes smaller, the sharpness of the game decreases. is assumed. It is feared that this will be a major constraint in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, under the condition that the game ball is continuously (continuously) launched to the right route from the second normal game state to the third. The average required period for transitioning to the first normal gaming state via the normal gaming state is changed from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state under the same circumstances. By setting the average required period or more in the case and gaining an interval until returning to the second normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress excessive ball ejection in a short time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restriction on the advantage of the second normal game state and strengthening the sharpness of the game (creating a cohesive ball output). For the above reasons, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the number of consecutive probabilistic jackpots stored by the probabilistic change continuous number counter is inherited from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, and the second normal game state is inherited. Depending on the number of probable change jackpots during the gaming state, the remaining number of times the second reference value is reached during the third normal gaming state may decrease. According to such a configuration, the second reference value is obtained when the transition to the third normal gaming state is performed without the second normal gaming state than when the transition to the third normal gaming state is performed via the second normal gaming state. There is a high possibility that the transition condition (10R probability variation jackpot A) to the second normal gaming state will be satisfied before reaching.

The number of consecutive probabilistic jackpots stored by the probabilistic continuous number counter is configured to be inherited from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state. As a result, the number of loops between the second normal gaming state and the special gaming state can change according to the number of probable change jackpots in the third normal gaming state. By strengthening the relationship between the second normal game state and the third normal game state in this way, it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game. In addition, when the third normal game state → the second normal game state → the third normal game state is established, the second reference value is higher in the second third normal game state than in the first third normal game state. The number of remaining times to reach is reduced. It is preferable to suppress an excessive loop between the third normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state in this way in order to ensure the soundness of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the case of shifting to the third normal gaming state, depending on whether or not the user has passed through the second normal gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, the number of consecutive probable change jackpots = the second normal before the second reference value is reached. The difficulty of establishing the transition condition to the gaming state (10R probability variation jackpot A), that is, the difficulty of returning to the second normal gaming state or promotion will be different. In particular, by giving preferential treatment to promotion to the third normal gaming state when not via the second normal gaming state, it is easier than returning to the third normal gaming state when passing through the second normal gaming state. It is possible to suppress excessive bias in the player's advantage while realizing diversification.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment described above, the average required time from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state via the third normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state from the first normal gaming state are set. The configuration is such that the average required time for transitioning to the third normal gaming state via the game is the same, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the average time required from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state via the third normal gaming state is the third normal time required from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state. A difference may be provided so as to be longer than the average required time for transitioning to the gaming state.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment described above, a return route from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is provided. Specifically, although it is an extremely low probability, if a 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached during the third normal gaming state, the configuration is such that the player can return to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state. .. Here, in the game times that trigger the transition to the second normal gaming state in the third normal gaming state, a long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes or more) is set as the fluctuation display time, and the second from the third normal gaming state to the second. Even when the transition to the normal gaming state is taken into consideration, the average staying time of the upper loop section (second normal gaming state to special gaming state) and the lower loop section in which the increase or decrease of the number of balls held is suppressed (third). By configuring the average staying time (from the gaming state to the special gaming state) to be the same or longer than the former, it is preferable to obtain an interval between a large number of balls.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, it is held in the section from the transition from the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state to the transition to the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state. The configuration is such that the reduction of spheres is suppressed (the configuration is such that the number of spheres is slightly reduced). In the present embodiment, the number of balls held in the section is increased, and the configuration related to the second normal gaming state is partially changed accordingly, which is different from the configuration of the first embodiment. are doing. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. 37 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for each operating port, FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing a first variable winning device, and FIG. 39 is a block diagram (game flow) showing the flow of a game.

As shown in FIG. 37, the distribution table for each operating port is stored for each type of normal gaming state. The distribution table for the first operating port is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 12 (a) and 37 (a)). On the other hand, the distribution table for the second operating port is different from the first embodiment in that the distribution of the jackpot is usually provided.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the distribution table for the second operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal gaming state, a distribution table for the second normal gaming state, and a distribution table for the third normal gaming state. It is roughly divided into the distribution table of.

Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 900 (11th result) of "0" to "899" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 10R probability variation jackpot B. A total of 100 pieces (12th result) of "900" to "999" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot.

Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 900 (11th result) of "0" to "899" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 10R probability variation jackpot A. A total of 100 pieces (12th result) of "900" to "999" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot.

Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 900 (11th result) of "0" to "899" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 10R probability variation jackpot B. A total of 100 pieces (12th result) of "900" to "999" correspond to the 10R normal jackpot.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the game rounds related to the second operating port 63a, the probability variation big hit distribution is 90% in any of the game states from the first normal game state to the third normal game state. It is stipulated in.

The 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode corresponds to the low probability mode and the support mode corresponds to the low frequency support, and when the 10R normal jackpot is reached, the low probability mode is passed through the first special gaming state. Moreover, it shifts to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the present embodiment, in the special gaming state (first special gaming state) in which the 2R probability variation jackpot A, the 10R probability variation jackpot B, and the 10R normal jackpot are triggered, the first variable winning device 64 is open. Will be. Then, when the game ball flows into the advantageous entry portion (V region) of the first variable winning device 64 during the first special game state, the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode after the end of the first special game state is completed. If the transition to the normal gaming state is confirmed and the gaming ball does not flow into the advantageous entry portion (V area), the transition to the normal gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode after the end of the special gaming state is completed. Is confirmed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the first variable winning device 64X in the present embodiment will be described.

(1st variable winning device 64X)
Inside the first variable winning device 64X, a ball passage 332X through which the game ball flowing into the first large winning opening 331 passes is formed. The ball passage 332X branches into a first branch passage 334X and a second branch passage 335X at an intermediate position thereof. A flow path switching member 336X capable of switching the flow destination of the game ball to the first branch passage 334X and the second branch passage 335X is arranged in this branch portion. The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336X is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 336X is configured to stand by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332X in a state where a drive signal is not output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

In the state where the flow path switching member 336X is arranged at the protruding position, the inlet portion of the first branch passage 334X is blocked by the flow path switching member 336X. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the first branch passage 334X is avoided, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 335X.

When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336X is output from the main control device 162 and the drive unit is in the excited state, the flow path switching member 336X moves to the retracted position where the protrusion to the ball passage 332X is avoided. The entrance portion of the first branch passage 334X is opened. As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the second branch passage 335X is avoided, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 334X.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 336X is predetermined by the type of the jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot, the flow path switching member 336X moves to the retracted position as the shutter 333 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 336X immediately after that. Is specified to return to the protruding position. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 336X to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball flowing into the first large winning opening 331 to reach the branch portion. Therefore, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot, the inflow to the first branch passage 334X is substantially avoided.

On the other hand, in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot and the 10R probability variation jackpot, the flow path switching member 336X moves to the retracted position as the shutter 333 moves from the closed position to the open position, but after that, the shutter 333 moves to the retracted position. Is specified to wait in the protruding position until it returns to the closed position. Therefore, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 10R probability variation jackpot, most of the game balls that have flowed into the first prize opening 331 will flow into the first branch passage 334X.

An upstream side detection sensor 391d is arranged in a portion of the ball passage 332X that is upstream of the branch portion, and a portion that is downstream of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 334X and the second branch passage. Downstream detection sensors 338X and 339X are arranged in the branch passage 335X. The upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338X and 339X are connected to the main control device 162, and in the main control device 162, the first variable winning device is based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d. Whether or not there is a prize in 64X is specified, and if a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338X and 339X.

In the main control device 162 shown in the present embodiment, the ball enters the first branch passage 334X during the open / close execution mode based on the detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338X attached to the first branch passage 334X. When it is specified that the occurrence has occurred, the lottery mode is switched from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (except when the above probability change limiter is activated). In the present embodiment, the first branch passage 334X corresponds to the "advantageous entry portion".

(Flow of the game)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

(1st normal game state)
In the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a prize is generated in the first operating port 62a (specifically, the lower operating port 62aL) arranged in the game area PE (left route). , Jackpot and special win lottery will be executed. In the present embodiment, the first normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a difference is provided so that the advantage of the player is the lowest among the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state.

When various big hits are made during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). As described above, in the first normal gaming state, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 10R probability variation jackpot A are provided as jackpots based on the winning of the first operating port 62a, and the division between the two in the first normal gaming state. The 2R probability variation jackpot is 66.5%, and the 10R probability variation jackpot A is 33.5% (see FIG. 37).

If the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the first special game state, and during the first normal game state. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the first special gaming state, the game shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

(Second normal game state)
In the second normal gaming state, the variable display time of the pattern (special figure 1) on the display unit D1 for the first operating port becomes long (1200 sec or 600 sec), and the pattern (special figure) on the display unit D2 for the second operating port becomes long. The fluctuation display time of 2) is short (1 sec or 5 sec). That is, by shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed between the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the display unit D2 for the second operating port (FIG. FIG. See 35). During the second normal gaming state, by launching the game ball to the right route, the game ball wins in either the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a, but the display unit for the first operating port As the variation display time in D1 becomes longer, the game progresses so that the game times related to the second operating port 63a become the main.

When various big hits are made in the second normal game state, the game shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). As described above, in the second normal gaming state, the 10R probability variable jackpot A and the 10R normal jackpot A and the 10R normal jackpot are provided as jackpots based on the winning of the second operating port 63a (see FIG. 37).

The pachinko machine shown in the present embodiment is also equipped with two types of limiters using two continuous counters, as in the first embodiment. In the second normal gaming state, the continuous number counters are updated when the loop is repeated. Specifically, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is a jackpot corresponding to the transition to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and by becoming the 10R probability variation jackpot A, the value of the time saving continuous count counter and the probability variation continuous count The values of the counters will be added by "1" respectively.

When the value of the time saving continuous number counter reaches the first reference value (corresponding to the number of consecutive times = 10 times), the loop ends, and after the first special gaming state, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are supported. It shifts to the third normal game state. At this time, the value of the time saving continuous number counter is cleared to 0. On the other hand, in the case of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, when the value of the time saving continuous number counter reaches the first reference value, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter becomes. The second reference value (corresponding to the number of consecutive times = 40 times) is not reached. Therefore, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is inherited from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state without being cleared to zero.

In addition, when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is made, the 10R probability variation jackpot A including the 10R probability variation jackpot A that triggered the transition can be continuously performed up to 10 times. If the 10R probability variation jackpot A continues until the time-saving limiter is activated, it can be expected that approximately 12,000 prize balls will be won.

Here, the distribution in the case of 10R probability variation jackpot A is 90%. The probability (completion probability) that the time-saving limiter operates when the first normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state is about 65%. If the 10R normal jackpot is reached before the time saving limiter is activated, the game shifts to (demotions) to the first normal gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state, but the probability is about 35%.

In the present embodiment, when the rate of increase of the game balls in a short time is compared, the increase in the number of balls held is assumed to be higher in the second normal game state than in the third normal game state. When the amounts (expected values) are compared, the third normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the second normal gaming state. That is, the advantage of the player is different from the first embodiment in that the relationship is that the first normal game state <the second normal game state <the third normal game state. That is, in order to aim for the third normal gaming state which is most advantageous to the player from the first normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state, the limiter for shortening the time while avoiding the 10R normal jackpot during the second normal gaming state. Need to be activated.

(Third normal game state)
As described above, the transition route to the third normal game state is roughly divided into two, a 2R probability variation jackpot in the first normal game state and a time saving limiter operation in the second normal game state.

In the third normal gaming state, the variable display time of the pattern (special figure 1) on the display unit D1 for the first operating port is short (0.1 sec or 5 sec), and the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port (0.1 sec or 5 sec). The variation display time of the special figure 2) is short (1200 sec or 600 sec). That is, when the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is performed, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed (see FIG. 35). That is, when the game ball is launched toward the right route as in the second normal game state, the game proceeds so that the game times related to the first operating port 62a are the main. On the other hand, when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is performed, the relationship between the length of the variable display time is maintained.

Here, with the transition to the third normal gaming state, the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. As a result, the probability of winning the first operating port 62a when the game ball is launched to the right route is lower than that in the high frequency support mode. However, most of the game times related to the first operating port 62a are special hits, and the second variable winning device 65 is opened.

During the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls are guided to the first operating port 62a by the electric accessory 71, and the second variable winning device 65 located on the downstream side of the first operating port 62a (right operating port 62aR). The flow of the game ball to is suppressed. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, a certain amount of game balls pass through the electric accessory 71 and flow down toward the second variable winning device 65, and about one game ball is concerned with one opening. It is set to win a prize in the second variable winning device 65. As a result, the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is alleviated.

Further, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained in the third normal game state, the process shifts to the first special game state (open / close execution mode). The 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and after the transition to the third normal gaming state, the 2R probability variation jackpot → the first special gaming state → the third normal gaming state will loop. .. Here, in the third normal gaming state, the breakdown of the case where a big hit is obtained by winning the first operating port 62a is that the 2R probability variable jackpot is 99.8% and the 10R probability variable jackpot A is 0.2%. There is. That is, most jackpots are 2R probability variable jackpots.

Further, in the lottery relating to the first operating port 62a, 1/2 of the lottery is a special hit. The second embodiment is the same as the first embodiment in that the second variable winning device 65 shifts to the second special gaming state in which the second variable winning device 65 is to be opened in the case of a special hit. The opening time of the second variable winning device 65 in the special gaming state is 1.8 sec, and the configuration is such that about two winnings can be generated by opening once. In this way, when the second normal gaming state and the first special gaming state are looping, the second special gaming state intervenes, so that the game can be continued while slightly increasing the number of balls held. There is. Further, in the second normal game state, the jackpot probability is 10 times that in the first normal game state, and a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained by the 2R probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, the number of prize balls per round is also increased by changing the opening target in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot from the second variable winning device 65 to the first variable winning device 64. In general, in the 3rd normal game state, by continuing to launch the game ball toward the right route, it is possible to proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls held, and the expected value exceeds the 2nd normal game state. Will be.

In the third normal game state, since all the jackpots correspond to the high probability mode, the above-mentioned time-saving continuous number counter is not updated and is maintained at 0. On the other hand, for the probability variation continuous number counter, "1" is added every time the probability variation jackpot is reached by the above loop. If the value of the probability variation continuous count counter does not reach the second reference value (corresponding to the number of consecutive times = 40 times), the loop is continued, and the value of the probability variation continuous count counter is the above second reference value (continuous). When the number of times = 40 times) is reached, the state shifts to the first normal gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state.

Although the probability is extremely low, if the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached before the limiter by the probability variation continuous number counter is activated, the game shifts to the second normal gaming state. In this case as well, the probability variation continuous count counter is continuously updated. That is, when the transition from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is performed, the difference between the value of the probability variation continuous number counter and the second reference value exceeds the first reference value. Subsequent behavior will change significantly.

Specifically, when the difference between the value of the continuous number counter for probability variation and the value of the second reference value exceeds the first reference value, the 10R probability variation jackpot that triggered the transition to the second normal gaming state. The 10R probability variation jackpot A including A will be generated 10 times in total, which will be a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held again. On the other hand, when the difference between the value of the probability variation continuous count counter and the value of the second reference value is lower than the first reference value, the time is shortened before the limiter by the probability variation continuous count counter is activated. The limiter by the continuous number counter is activated, and after increasing the number of balls held to some extent, the game returns to the third normal game state. In this case as well, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is carried over to the third normal gaming state. That is, in the case of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state and returning to the third normal gaming state again, the third normal gaming state is compared with the first transition to the third normal gaming state. The stay will be short.

When the value of the time saving continuous number counter reaches the first reference value and the value of the probability variation continuous number counter reaches the second reference value, the state shifts from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state. It will be.

Next, the relationship between the opportunity to shift to the third normal gaming state and the period of stay in the third normal gaming state will be supplementarily described. When the time saving limiter is activated after the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state and the transition to the third normal gaming state is performed, the probability variation continuous count counter is already related to the time reduction counter. It means that the count is advanced by the amount of the first reference value. That is, the "remaining number of times" until the probability change limiter is activated = "second reference value"-"first reference". On the other hand, when a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the first normal gaming state, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is added by the amount of the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the third normal gaming state is started. Therefore, the "remaining number of times" until the probability change limiter is activated = "second reference value" -1.

As described above, the first reference value is greater than 1. For this reason, the case of shifting to the third normal game state triggered by the 2R probability variation jackpot during the first normal game state is more than the case of shifting to the third normal game state due to the operation of the time saving limiter. The period of stay in the state, that is, the degree of expectation of promotion to the second normal gaming state is high.

In the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the number of consecutive big hits (10R probability variation big hit A) corresponding to the high frequency support mode stored by the time saving continuous number counter has reached the specified number of times. If not, the player returns to the second normal gaming state after the end of the special gaming state triggered by the jackpot. When such a loop is repeated and the number of consecutive times reaches the first reference value, the game shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. That is, the arrival of the first reference value is an opportunity to shift to the third normal gaming state. In the third normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a special hit is higher than in the second normal gaming state, and the transition to the second special gaming state occurs frequently. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls held during the third normal game state. According to the above configuration, the player who expects the transition to the third normal gaming state repeats the transition to the first special gaming state during the second normal gaming state to earn a ball and earn a third normal game. The aim is to shift to the state, and the satisfaction level of the player can be suitably improved.

In this embodiment, the 10R normal jackpot can be won by the lottery related to the second operating port 63a, and the 10R normal jackpot is avoided in order to aim at the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state. At the same time, it is necessary to make the 10R probability variation jackpot A continuous. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the tension of the game in the second normal game state.

If the 10R normal jackpot ends immediately after the transition to the 3rd normal gaming state through the 2nd normal gaming state and the 3rd normal gaming state ends, the player's motivation to play in the 3rd normal gaming state is rapid. It is feared that it will decrease to. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if the holding information related to the second operating port 63a cannot be stocked and the game times related to the second operating port 63a become a 10R normal jackpot. The 10R normal jackpot is invalidated by the game times related to the first operating port 62a (specifically, the game times related to the big hit or the special hit). That is, it is regulated that the 10R normal jackpot will be obtained after the transition to the third normal gaming state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the configuration that can be a 10R normal jackpot from becoming a factor that extremely shortens the staying time in the third normal gaming state, and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

After the transition to the third normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state and the special gaming state will loop until the number of consecutive hits that have become probable change jackpots reaches the second reference value. With such a configuration, the period of stay in the third normal gaming state is earned, and it is suitably suppressed from being demoted from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state immediately after the transition to the third normal gaming state. can.

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, after a large amount of balls are released due to the loop between the second normal gaming state and the first special gaming state, a large increase in the number of balls held is unlikely to occur (low risk low return). ) The configuration is such that the transition to the first normal gaming state is performed via the third normal gaming state. As a result, while creating a cohesive exit ball (bias of an exit ball), the excessive increase in gambling caused by it was suppressed. In the present embodiment, although it is possible to solve the same problem as the problem solved in the first embodiment, the specific configuration for solving the problem is different from that in the first embodiment. There is. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for each operating port, FIG. 41 is a block diagram (game flow) showing the flow of the game, and FIG. 42 is a timing chart illustrating changes in the ball held as the game progresses.

As shown in FIG. 40, the distribution table for each operating port is normally stored for each type of gaming state. The distribution table for the second operating port is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 12 (b) and 40 (b)). On the other hand, regarding the distribution table for the first operating port, the distribution table for the first normal game state, the distribution table for the second normal game state, and the distribution for the third normal game state. Although it is the same as the distribution table for the first operating port shown in the first embodiment in that it is roughly classified into a table, the configuration of the distribution table for the third normal gaming state is the first implementation. It is different from the distribution table for the first operating port shown in the above form.

Specifically, for the distribution table for the third normal gaming state, a total of 665 of the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are "0" to "664" (first result). , "665" to "997", a total of 333 (second result), and "998" to "999", a total of two (third result), both correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot. As described above, the 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display time table of the jackpot result arrears in Europe is also partially changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, the variation display time of the pattern of the display unit for the first operating port in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is changed from "5 sec" to "2 sec". It has been shortened. As a result, when a big hit (2R probability variation big hit) occurs during the third normal gaming state, the time required to shift to the first special gaming state is shortened.

In the first embodiment described above, the second normal gaming state and the first special gaming state are looped until the time saving limiter is activated, so that the assumed upper limit number of 12,000 prize balls is paid out, and then the prize balls are paid out. Is a loop until the 3rd normal game state, the 1st special game state, and the 2nd special game state are activated until the limiter for probabilistic change is activated, and the number of balls held is slightly reduced by the time the limiter is changed to the 1st normal game state. The number of prize balls is adjusted to about 11,900. In other words, it is configured to generate a strategy of whether or not to aim for the 10R probability variation jackpot A, which has an extremely low probability, with an investment of 100 shots until the probability variation limiter is activated. In the present embodiment, the second normal game state and the first special game state are looped until the time saving limiter is activated, so that 11,000 prize balls, which is a smaller number than the assumed upper limit number, are paid out. After that, the 3rd normal game state, the 1st special game state, and the 2nd special game state loop until the limiter for probabilistic change is activated, and the number of balls held increases slightly until the state shifts to the 1st normal game state. The number of prize balls is adjusted to be about 11,100 (see FIG. 42). During the 3rd normal game state, 2R probability variation jackpots and special hits occur frequently, resulting in a slight increase in the number of balls held. All types are limited to 2R probability variation jackpots, and the transition to the second normal gaming state where a large number of balls can be expected is restricted. In other words, in the third normal game state, it takes about 30 minutes (until the limiter for probabilistic variation is activated) to acquire 100 game balls, while there is an opportunity to acquire a large number of balls. Not provided. According to the configuration described in detail above, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling caused by the creation of a large number of balls.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, during the third normal gaming state, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port is significantly larger than the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port. The game is shortened to the above, and the game progresses mainly around the game times related to one operating port 62a. Although the 10R probability variation jackpot A corresponding to the transition to the second normal gaming state can be obtained in the game round related to the second operating port 63a, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is a special hit in the gaming round related to the first operating port 62a. It is effectively invalidated by becoming a probable change jackpot. As a result, during the third normal game state, a large amount of balls can be expected to be thrown if the 10R probability variation jackpot A (0.2%) is won based on the winning of the first operating port before the probability variation limiter is activated. The transition opportunity was limited so as to shift to the second normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a part of the jackpot is hit during the third normal gaming state, the result of the gaming round related to the second operating port 63a is not substantially invalidated, and the result is not invalidated. It is one of the features that the opportunity to shift to the second normal gaming state is diversified by making the above effective. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for each operating port, FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the variable display time table, and FIG. 45 shows the relationship between the variable display time and the opportunity to shift to the special gaming state. It is a schematic diagram.

(Distribution table for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the distribution table for the first operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal gaming state, a distribution table for the second normal gaming state, and a distribution table for the third normal gaming state. It is roughly divided into the distribution table of.

Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 665 (first result) of "0" to "664" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 2R probability variation jackpots. A total of 330 pieces (second result) of "665" to "994" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and a total of three pieces (third result) of "995" to "997" correspond to 10R. It corresponds to the probability variation jackpot A, and a total of two (fourth result) of "998" to "999" correspond to the probability variation jackpot A.

Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 665 (first result) of "0" to "664" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 2R probability variation jackpots. A total of 330 pieces (second result) of "665" to "994" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and a total of three pieces (third result) of "995" to "997" correspond to 10R. It corresponds to the probability variation jackpot A, and a total of two (fourth result) of "998" to "999" correspond to the probability variation jackpot A.

Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 665 (first result) of "0" to "664" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "999" are 2R probability variation jackpots. A total of 330 pieces (second result) of "665" to "994" correspond to the 2R probability change jackpot, and a total of three pieces (third result) of "995" to "997" correspond to 10R probability change. It corresponds to the jackpot C, and a total of two (4th result) of "998" to "999" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A.

(Distribution table for the second operating port)
As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the distribution table for the second operating port includes a distribution table for the first normal gaming state, a distribution table for the second normal gaming state, and a distribution table for the third normal gaming state. It is roughly divided into the distribution table of.

Regarding the distribution table for the first normal game state, a total of 1000 pieces of "0" to "999" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot B. .. Regarding the distribution table for the second normal game state, a total of 1000 pieces of "0" to "999" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A. .. Regarding the distribution table for the third normal game state, a total of 1000 pieces of "0" to "999" among the values of the hit type counters C2 of "0" to "999" correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A. .. The 10R probability variation jackpot A is a jackpot corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and in the present embodiment, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port during the third normal gaming state. In that case, the configuration is such that the third normal gaming state can be shifted to the second normal gaming state.

Here, the 10R probability variation jackpot C is a jackpot corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode as in the 10R probability variation jackpot B. However, there is a difference in the set fluctuation display time from the 10R probability variation jackpot B. Hereinafter, the variable display time set during the third normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 44. Since the variable display time set during the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Variable display time)
First, a variable display time table for the first operating port referred to during the third normal gaming state will be described. In the variable display time table for the first operating port, the variable display time is "0.1 sec" when the game times related to the first operating port 62a correspond to complete deviation, and when it corresponds to a special hit. The variable display time is "0.1 sec", the variable display time is "5 sec" when the 2R probability variable jackpot is supported, and the variable display time is "5 sec" when the 10R probability variable jackpot A is supported. When the 10R probability variation jackpot C is supported, the fluctuation display time is specified to be "601 sec".

Next, the variable display time table for the second operating port referred to during the third normal gaming state will be described. In the variable display time table for the second operating port, when the game times related to the second operating port 63a correspond to complete deviation, the variable display time corresponds to "1200 sec", and when it corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot A. Is specified so that the variable display time is "600 sec".

That is, in the present embodiment, the variable display time set when the 10R probability variation jackpot C is obtained by winning the first operating port 62a during the third normal gaming state is the second during the third normal gaming state. It is set when it is longer than the fluctuation display time set when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained by winning the operating port 63a and when it is completely out of the range due to the winning of the second operating port 63a during the third normal gaming state. It is specified to be shorter than the variable display time.

Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the flow of the game during the third normal game state will be illustrated.

In the example shown in FIG. 45A, a prize is generated in the second operating port 63a at the timing of ta0, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit D2 for the second operating port. This game time corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and "600 sec" is set as the variable display time of the pattern. During the game times related to the second operating port display unit D2, the game times related to the first operating port display unit D1 are repeated, and at the timing of ta1, the game times corresponding to the special hit are started. In the game times corresponding to the special hit, "0.1 sec" is set as the fluctuation display time of the pattern, and at the timing of ta2 when 0.1 sec has elapsed from the timing of ta2, the display unit D1 for the first operating port is specially hit. The corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed). At this timing, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port is forcibly terminated so that the pattern corresponding to the disengagement is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). That is, even if the winning of the second operating port 63a results in a 10R probability variation jackpot A and the transition to the first special gaming state is refrained, the winning of the first operating opening 62a results in a special winning of the 10R probability variation. The jackpot A will be cancelled.

The same applies to the behavior when a 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained or a 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained by winning a prize in the first operating port 62a. That is, if the game times related to the first operating port display unit D1 are completed before the game times related to the second operating port display unit D2 are completed, the probability of 10R is changed by winning the second operating port 63a. Even if it becomes a jackpot A and the transition to the first special gaming state is refrained, the 10R probability variation jackpot A will be cancelled.

Further, while the game times corresponding to the disconnection are being executed by the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the game times related to the display unit D1 for the first operating port (special hit, 2R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot). When is terminated, the game rounds related to the display unit D2 for the second operating port are forcibly terminated in the middle of the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 45B, a prize is generated in the second operating port 63a at the timing of tb0, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit D2 for the second operating port. This game time corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and "600 sec" is set as the variable display time of the pattern. At the timing of tb1 during the game rotation related to the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the game rotation corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C is started. In the game times corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C, "601 sec" is set as the variation display time of the pattern.

The variable display of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the variable display of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port are executed in parallel, but the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port is executed in parallel. The variation display of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port ends at the timing of tb2 before the timing of tb4 where the variation display time is scheduled to elapse, and the pattern corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C is stopped and displayed ( It will be confirmed). That is, in the present embodiment, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained based on the winning of the second operating port 63a, and the first operating port 62a is awarded while the game times related to the 10R probability variation jackpot A are being executed. If the 10R probability variation jackpot C is obtained based on the above, the game times on the display unit D2 for the second operating port will reach maturity as an exception.

At the timing of tb3 when the confirmation display of the pattern corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot A is completed on the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the first special gaming state is started with the 10R probability variation jackpot A as a trigger. Then, after the end of the first special gaming state, the transition (promotion) to the second normal gaming state is performed on condition that the limiter for probabilistic change is not activated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45 (c), the behavior when the 10R probability variation jackpot C is obtained while the game round related to the disconnection is being executed by the display unit D2 for the second operating port will be described.

In the example shown in FIG. 45 (c), a prize is generated in the second operating port 63a at the timing of tc0, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit D2 for the second operating port. This game time corresponds to the deviation, and "1200 sec" is set as the variable display time of the pattern. At the timing of tc1 during the game rotation related to the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the game rotation corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C is started. In the game times corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C, "601 sec" is set as the variation display time of the pattern.

The variable display of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the variable display of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port are executed in parallel, but the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port is executed in parallel. The variation display of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port ends at the timing of ct2 before the timing of ct4 where the variation display time of is scheduled to elapse, and the pattern corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C is stopped and displayed ( Confirmed display). In this case, the game rounds related to the second operating port 63a are forcibly terminated, and the pattern corresponding to the disengagement is forcibly stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display unit D2 for the second operating port.

At the timing of tk3 when the confirmation display of the pattern corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C is completed on the display unit D1 for the first operating port, the first special gaming state is started with the 10R probability variation jackpot C as a trigger. Then, after the end of the first special gaming state, the process returns to the third normal gaming state on condition that the limiter for probabilistic change is not activated.

In the present embodiment, when the 10R probability variation jackpot C is reached during the third normal game state, a video (special effect) for the 10R probability variation jackpot C prepared in advance is displayed. At the time of the 10R probability variation jackpot C, it is not clearly shown to the player which behavior of FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. 45 (c) will be. Then, during the timing of tb2, tc2, the timing of tb3, tc3, or the first special gaming state that shifts immediately after, the player is clearly shown whether the jackpot this time is the 10R probability variation jackpot A or the 10R probability variation jackpot C. It will be. That is, whether or not there is a transition (promotion) to the second normal gaming state is clearly indicated.

Regarding the special effect, the first special effect having a story that is executed when the remaining time until the end of the game round is longer than the specified time, and the special effect is executed when the remaining time until the end of the game round is less than the specified time. A second special effect that does not have a story is provided, and the remaining time is calculated at the start or before the start of the game round corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot C, and the first special effect and the first special effect are calculated based on the calculation result. It is advisable to use the second special effect properly.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a is configured so that the 10R probability variation jackpot A, which triggers the transition to the second normal gaming state, can be won, but this has been changed. , It is also possible to make a configuration in which the 10R probability variation jackpot A, which triggers the transition to the second normal gaming state, is not won in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62a.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment described above, a lottery based on a prize in the second operating port 63a is configured to be able to win the 10R probability variation jackpot A that triggers the transition to the second normal gaming state, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not something. Similar to the first embodiment described above, it is also possible to make a configuration in which the 10R probability variation jackpot A, which triggers the transition to the second normal gaming state, is not won in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a. be.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, when the 10R probability variation jackpot C is obtained based on the winning of the first operating port 62a during the third normal gaming state, a special variation in which the variation display time becomes "601 sec" occurs. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to determine whether or not to generate a special fluctuation by a lottery different from the lottery of the type of big hit. Specifically, the presence or absence of special fluctuation may be determined by the setting process for the third normal gaming state executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162. Hereinafter, the setting process for the third normal gaming state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The third normal game state setting process is a process executed as a part of step S508 in the first actuation opening variation start process of FIG. 19 when the game state is the third normal game state.

In the third normal game state setting process, first, it is determined in step S1701 whether or not the game times (game times related to the first operating port 62a) started this time correspond to complete deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the variable display time setting process for complete deviation is executed, and the third normal game state setting process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to a special hit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, the variable display time setting process for special hits is executed, and the third normal game state setting process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the game is being rotated according to the second operating port 63a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is determined whether or not the game times related to the second operating port 63a correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1707, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining times until the probability change limiter is activated is N times or more (specifically, the first reference value or more which is the threshold value for the time saving limiter operation). If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1707, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, the special variation lottery process is executed with reference to the special variation lottery table stored in the ROM 603 and the value of the special variation lottery counter stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 of the RAM 604. ..

If the special variation is won in the lottery process of step S1708, an affirmative determination is made in step S1709 and the process proceeds to step S1710. In step S1710, a special setting process for a big hit is executed. Specifically, "601 sec" is set as the variable display time of the game times this time. If the lottery in step S1708 is not won, a negative determination is made in step S1709 and the process proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, a normal setting process for a big hit is executed. Specifically, "5 sec" is set as the variable display time of the game times this time. Even if a negative determination is made in any of steps S1705, S1706, and S1707, the normal setting process is executed in step S1711.

In this way, if a big hit is achieved by winning a prize in the first operating port 62a, the degree of attention to the game can be increased by configuring the configuration so that the player can shift (promote) to the second normal gaming state regardless of the type. It can be suitably improved.

In addition, in this modification 1, the special variation can occur only in the game times which is a big hit, but instead of or in addition to this, the special variation can occur in the game times which is a special hit. It is also possible.

<Modification example 4>
Also in the fourth embodiment, it is possible to have a configuration in which a normal jackpot (see the third embodiment) can be won by a lottery based on a prize in the second operating port 63a. In such a configuration, the display unit D2 for the second operating port is used for the game times that are normal jackpots (big hits that trigger the transition to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode). As the variation display time of the pattern in the above, it is preferable to set "600 sec" as in the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained during the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the second normal mode corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is obtained. It is configured to shift (promote) to the game state. In such a configuration, the count information (value of the probability variation continuous number counter) of the probability variation limiter is inherited even when the transition from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state. Therefore, the probability change limiter can be operated before the time saving limiter is operated in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In the first embodiment, when such an event occurs, the loop in the second normal gaming state is configured to shift (demotion) to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It was suppressed that the excessive number of balls that exceeded the expectation was generated by repeating the above. In the present embodiment, the specific configuration for suppressing excessive ball ejection is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 47, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 63a. Here, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a, all of them correspond to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and the second normal gaming state and the first special gaming state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A are By looping, the player can greatly increase the number of balls he has.

During the second normal game state, each value of the probability variation continuous count counter and the time reduction continuous count counter is updated (“1” is added) every time the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached. As described above, when the state shifts from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, the update of the probability variation continuous count counter and the time reduction continuous count counter both starts from "0". Therefore, before the value of the probability variation continuous count counter becomes the second reference value and the probability variation limiter operates, the value of the time reduction continuous count counter becomes the first reference value and the time reduction limiter operates. .. Therefore, when the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is performed, the time saving limiter is activated and the second normal gaming state is changed to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It will be transferred (demoted).

On the other hand, when the state shifts to the second normal gaming state via the third normal gaming state, the behavior may be different from the above behavior. Specifically, the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode as described above. Therefore, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is inherited between the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and the time saving limiter is transferred at the timing when the third normal game state is changed to the second normal game state. An event may occur in which the number of remaining times until the operation exceeds the number of times remaining until the probabilistic limiter operation.

If the probability change limiter is activated before the time saving limiter is activated in the second normal gaming state, the mode shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In the fourth normal gaming state, although the electric accessory 71 supports winning the first operating port 62a, it is for the second operating port rather than the variation display time (for example, 1200 sec) of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first operating port. The variation display time (for example, 1 sec) of the pattern on the display unit D2 is shorter, and the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second operating port 63a.

In the fourth normal game state, the game is continued until the game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed 100 times, and when the executed game times reach 100 times, the first normal game state is entered. It will be migrated.

In the 4th normal game state, all the distributions in the case of a big hit in the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd operating port 63a are 10R probability variation big hit A. Therefore, although it is a low probability mode in which the probability of a big hit is low, if a big hit occurs during the 4th normal gaming state, the mode shifts to the 2nd normal gaming state (except when the time saving limiter is activated).

When shifting from the second normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state, the value of the probability variation continuous number counter is reset (cleared to 0). Therefore, if the player can shift (promote) from the 4th normal gaming state to the 2nd normal gaming state, the player can launch the ball during the previous 2nd normal gaming state, or the ball during the 4th normal gaming state. A total of about 12,000 balls can be enjoyed in total after the second normal game state.

However, when the probability change limiter is activated during the second normal game state to shift (demotion) to the fourth normal game state, the value of the time saving continuous number counter is inherited. Then, the value of the time-saving continuous number counter that has been inherited to the 4th normal gaming state is also inherited when shifting (promoting) from the 4th normal gaming state to the 2nd normal gaming state. Therefore, in the case of the second normal game state → the fourth normal game state → the second normal game state, the upper limit of the ball ejection in the later second normal game state is suppressed to a low level, and as described above, the fourth Even if pullback occurs in the normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of excessive ball ejection in a short period of time.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained during the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, so that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set from the third normal gaming state. Although it is configured to be promoted to the corresponding second normal gaming state, such a promotion route is not an essential configuration. It suffices if the second normal gaming state is configured to be advantageous to the player at least as compared with the first normal gaming state, and the specifics for giving preferential treatment to the third normal gaming state over the first normal gaming state. The configuration is arbitrary. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration related to the promotion route, a configuration in which the 10R normal jackpot X can be won during the third normal gaming state, and when the 10R normal jackpot X is won, a low probability mode and a high frequency are used. The configuration is such that the transition to the normal gaming state X corresponding to the support mode is made, and when a big hit is made in the normal gaming state X, the transition to the second normal gaming state is confirmed in any case. 2 It is preferable to give preferential treatment so that the probability of transitioning to the normal gaming state is higher than the probability of transitioning to the second normal gaming state during the third normal gaming state. In order to make the normal game state X more advantageous to the player than the third normal game state, the base in the normal game state X (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of shots of the game ball) is the base in the third normal game state. The above is preferable.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the first reference value (10) of the time saving limiter is made smaller than the difference (30) between the second reference value (40) of the probability variation limiter and the first reference value. , Not limited to this. The value of the first reference value of the time saving limiter may be larger than the difference between the second reference value of the time saving limiter and the first reference value, or the value of the first reference value of the time saving limiter may be used for probabilistic change. It may be the same as the difference between the second reference value of the limiter and the first reference value.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the number of balls held is slightly reduced in the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, but the balls held during the third normal game state. The 10R probability variable jackpot A, which triggers the transition from the type of jackpot due to winning the first operating port 62a to the second normal gaming state, may be excluded. In this case, instead of limiting a large number of balls due to the transition (promotion) to the second normal game state during the third normal game state, the (variable winning device) at the time of the 2R probability change big hit, which occurs less frequently than the special hit. You may realize a game aiming to increase the number of balls you have by over-winning (at the time of opening 64). In this case, it is advisable to add a flow path to the first variable winning device 64 in order to reduce the difficulty of over winning. For example, it is preferable to form a guide passage for guiding a part of the game ball that has passed through the second actuating entry portion 63 to the first variable winning device 64 on the outer route.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, as the transition route to the third normal gaming state, a route from the first normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state and a route directly transitioning from the first normal gaming state are used. Although it is provided, it is possible to omit the route that directly shifts from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the gaming progresses so that the gaming times related to the display unit D1 for the first operating port become the main. A difference is provided in the display time of the pattern in the display units D1 and D2 for each operating port, but the variation of the pattern in the display units D1 and D2 for each operating port is within the range in which such a function can be guaranteed. The display time may be changed arbitrarily.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when the game is continuously performed (when the firing operation of the game ball is continuously executed), the state shifts from the first normal game state to the second normal game state. When the time saving limiter is activated and the time required to shift to the third normal game state is about 30 minutes, and then the game is continuously performed (when the game ball launch operation is continuously executed). In addition, the time required when the probability change limiter operates in the third normal game state to shift to the first normal game state is about 30 minutes, and the first standard of the time saving continuous number counter so that each required time becomes the same. The value and the second reference value of the probability variation continuous number counter are set, but the present invention is not limited to this.

When the game is continuously performed (when the launch operation of the game ball is continuously executed), the first normal game state is changed to the second normal game state, and the time saving limiter is activated to operate the third normal. When the time required to shift to the game state is that the game is continuously performed after that (when the game ball launch operation is continuously executed), the probability change limiter is activated in the third normal game state. The first reference value of the time saving continuous number counter and the second reference value of the probability variation continuous number counter may be set so as to be clearly longer than the required time for shifting to the first normal gaming state. For example, the difference between the first reference value and the second reference value may be smaller than that of the first embodiment.

In addition, when the game is continuously performed (when the launch operation of the game ball is continuously executed), the time saving limiter is activated by shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state. 3 When the time required to shift to the normal game state is that the game is continuously performed after that (when the launch operation of the game ball is continuously executed), the probability change limiter is set in the third normal game state. Even if the first reference value of the time saving continuous number counter and the second reference value of the probability variation continuous number counter are set so as to be clearly shorter than the time required for operating and shifting to the first normal gaming state. good. For example, the difference between the first reference value and the second reference value may be larger than that of the first embodiment.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the second variable winning device 65 corresponding to the low frequency winning mode and the first variable winning device 64 corresponding to the high frequency winning mode are individually provided, but the present invention is not limited thereto. not. It is also possible to integrate the first variable winning device 64 and the second variable winning device 65 into one variable winning device.

Further, it is also possible to set the opening target in the low frequency winning mode as the first variable winning device 64 and the opening target in the high frequency winning mode as the second variable winning device 65.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, a difference is provided so that the prize ball based on one prize in the second variable winning device 65 is smaller than the prize ball based on one prize in the first variable winning device 64. However, it is not limited to this. The difference may be provided so that the prize ball based on one prize in the second variable winning device 65 is larger than the prize ball based on one prize in the first variable winning device 64, or the second variable winning device may be provided. The number of prize balls based on one prize in 65 may be the same as the number of prize balls based on one prize in the first variable winning device 64.

(9) The right-hand side actuating ball entry portion 62R shown in each of the above embodiments may be arranged at a position to be the first variable winning device 64 and the second variable winning device 65 on the right route.

(10) The second actuating ball entry portion 63 may be arranged on the flow path (inner route) toward the first variable winning device 64 or the second variable winning device 65.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a are configured to be able to be executed while one is being executed. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the game times related to the first operating port 62a and the game times related to the second operating port 63a so that the other cannot be executed while one is being executed. In such a configuration, the game times related to the first operating port 62a may be executed with priority over the game times related to the second operating port 63a, or the game times related to the second operating port 63a may be executed first. It may be configured to be executed with priority over the game times related to one operating port 62a. It is also possible to execute each game in the order of winning.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the ridges 335a and 336a are provided as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 333 of the first variable winning device 64, but the protrusions 335a and 336a pass over the shutter 333. The specific configuration for earning the required time is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit of the shutter 333 may be provided with irregularities so that the flow path meanders up and down.

Further, the second variable winning device 65 may also be provided with a deceleration means (for example, a configuration corresponding to the ridge portions 335a and 336a) for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 343.

(13) The first variable winning device 64 and the second variable winning device 65 shown in the above embodiments are configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by sliding the shutters 333 and 343 in the front-rear direction. , Not limited to this. For example, the shutter may be switched between the open state and the closed state by sliding and moving in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. The shutters 333 and 343 do not necessarily have to be a slide type, but can be a rotary type.

Further, the right-side actuating ball entry portion 62R shown in the above embodiment has a configuration in which the movable piece of the electric accessory 71 rotates in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60 to switch between the open state and the closed state. It is not limited to this. For example, the movable piece may be configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by rotating in the direction intersecting the front surface of the game board. The movable piece does not necessarily have to be a rotary type, and a slide type is also possible.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a is not a special hit, but this is changed and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63a is changed. May be a special hit configuration.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the pattern variation display on the actuating port display units D1 and D2 and the design on the symbol display device 75 are based on the winning / failing lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. The configuration is such that the variable display is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the winning / failing lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162, it is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the number of continuous jackpots in which the time-saving limiter operates (first reference value) is set to be smaller than the number of continuous jackpots in which the probability variation limiter operates (second reference value). However, the number of continuous jackpots in which the time-saving limiter operates (first reference value) may be set to be larger than the number of continuous jackpots in which the probability variation limiter operates (second reference value), or the time-saving limiter may be set. The number of continuous jackpots that operate (first reference value) and the number of consecutive jackpots that the probability variation limiter operates (second reference value) may be set to be the same.

(17) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and becomes a big hit, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, a pachinko machine and a slot machine equipped with a take-in device, in which a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device and then the start lever is operated to start the rotation of the reel. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which and is fused.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technique of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features A1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, there are a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state rather than the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) that becomes longer,
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information includes the determination result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode and the determination result that triggers the transition to the second switching mode.
The first storage means has a first storage means (probability variation continuous number counter) for storing the number of consecutive times when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode. When the number of consecutive times stored reaches the first specified number of times (for example, 40 times), the first of the predetermined gaming states to shift to the gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode with the end of the special gaming state. Special transition means and (probability change limiter function in MPU 602 of main controller 162),
It has a second storage means (time saving continuous number counter) for storing the number of consecutive times when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that triggers the transition to the second switching mode, and the second storage means. When the number of consecutive times stored in is reached the second specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the game state corresponding to the first switching mode among the predetermined game states is shifted to with the end of the special game state. It is equipped with a second special transition means (time saving limiter function in MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
When a specific determination result (10R probability variation jackpot A) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained during the gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, which is one of the predetermined gaming states. A gaming machine characterized in that both the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means are updated.

According to the feature A1, in the gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the entry into the starting entry section and the determination (lottery) based on the entry are given preferential treatment. In this gaming state, the continuous number of times stored by the first storage means and the continuous number of times stored by the second storage means are updated by the specific determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Here, when the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means (the number of consecutive times of the determination result that triggers the transition to the high-probability mode) reaches the first specified number of times, the game state is shifted to the low-probability mode. Then, when the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means (the number of consecutive times of the determination result that triggers the transition to the second switching mode) reaches the second specified number of times, the gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is entered. Transition. That is, the subsequent development of the game changes greatly depending on whether the transition by the first special transition means occurs or the transition by the second special transition means occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times are different.

If the configuration is such that the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times are different as shown in the feature A2, in the second gaming state, the case where the transition by the first special transition means occurs and the transition by the second special transition means occur. A branch from the case where it occurs will occur. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the second specified number of times is less than the first specified number of times.

According to the feature A3, the high-probability mode can be easily maintained at the transition destination from the gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode, and the opportunity to obtain the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information can be maintained. .. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the game at the transition destination, as compared with the configuration in which the second switching mode is easily maintained at the transition destination from the gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, for example. ..

Feature A4. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, there are a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state rather than the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) that becomes longer,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low, and a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode, and a second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode (the first normal gaming state). A second normal game state) and a third game state (third normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode are provided.
The determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information includes the determination result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode and the determination result that triggers the transition to the second switching mode.
The first storage means has a first storage means (probability variation continuous number counter) for storing the number of consecutive times when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode. When the number of consecutive times stored reaches the first specified number of times (for example, 40 times), the first of the predetermined gaming states to shift to the gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode with the end of the special gaming state. Special transition means and (probability change limiter function in MPU 602 of main controller 162),
It has a second storage means (time saving continuous number counter) for storing the number of consecutive times when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that triggers the transition to the second switching mode, and the second storage means. When the number of consecutive times stored in is reached the second specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the game state corresponding to the first switching mode among the predetermined game states is shifted to with the end of the special game state. It is equipped with a second special transition means (time saving limiter function in MPU 602 of the main control device 162).
The second specified number of times is less than the first specified number of times.
If a specific determination result (10R probability variation jackpot A) that triggers the transition to the high probability mode and the second switching mode is obtained during the second gaming state, it is stored in the first storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that both the number of consecutive times and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means are updated.

According to the feature A4, in the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the entry into the starting entry section and the determination (lottery) based on the entry are given preferential treatment. In this second gaming state, the number of consecutive times stored by the first storage means and the number of consecutive times stored by the second storage means are updated by providing a specific determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. To. Here, when the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means (the number of consecutive times of the determination result that triggers the transition to the high-probability mode) reaches the first specified number of times, the game state is shifted to the low-probability mode. Then, when the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means (the number of consecutive times of the determination result that triggers the transition to the second switching mode) reaches the second specified number of times, the gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is entered. Transition. That is, the development of the subsequent game changes greatly depending on which of the two types of limiters operates. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, since the second specified number of times is less than the first specified number of times, the transfer by the first special transfer means is likely to occur before the transfer by the second special transfer means occurs. That is, the high-probability mode can be easily maintained at the transition destination from the gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode, and the opportunity to obtain the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information can be maintained. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotonicization of the game at the transition destination, as compared with the configuration in which the second switching mode is easily maintained at the transition destination from the gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, for example. ..

Feature A5. In the second special transition means, the determination result by the determination means becomes the specific determination result during the third gaming state, and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means reaches the second specified number of times. In this case, the gaming machine according to feature A4, which is configured to shift to the third gaming state upon termination of the special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, the effect shown in feature A4 is preferable if the configuration is such that a specific determination result is obtained during the third gaming state and the game shifts to the third gaming state when the number of consecutive times reaches the second specified number of times. Can be demonstrated.

Feature A6. When the second special transition means shifts from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, the number of consecutive times stored by the second storage means is reset, whereas the first storage The memory of the number of consecutive times by means is retained, and it is configured to be retained.
In the third gaming state, the number of consecutive times stored by the first storage means is updated when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode. And
In the first special transition means, the determination result by the determination means during the third gaming state becomes the determination result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode, and the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means is the number of consecutive times. The gaming machine according to feature A5, which is configured to shift to the first gaming state when the first specified number of times is reached, when the special gaming state ends.

According to the feature A6, after the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the second special transition means, the continuous number of times stored in the first storage means triggers the transition to the high probability mode. It will be updated by becoming. Then, when the number of consecutive times reaches the first predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the first gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. With the configuration in which the limiter is operated step by step in this way, the diversification of the game shown in the feature A4 can be suitably realized.

Feature A7. It is configured so that the continuous number of times stored in the first storage means and the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means at the time of transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state match. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A4 to the feature A6, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature A7, it is possible to suppress the simultaneous operation of the two types of limiters and preferably realize the diversification of the game by the stepwise operation of the limiter.

Feature A8. When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode and the second switching mode during the first gaming state, the second is accompanied by the end of the special gaming state. Equipped with a means to shift to the game state,
The first special transition means shifts to the gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the transition to the low probability mode, or by the first special transition means. In some cases, it has a means for resetting the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means.
In the second special transition means, when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the transition to the first switching mode, or by the second special transition means, the gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is entered. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A7, characterized in that it has a means for resetting the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means when shifting.

According to the feature A8, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means match. It becomes. With such a configuration, the function of shifting the activation timing of the limiter by the difference between the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times (specifically, the function of the limiter by the second special moving means to operate in advance) is suitably exhibited. Can be made to.

Feature A9. As the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the third gaming state, the first determination result (2R probability variation jackpot) that triggers the transition to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the high probability mode and A second determination result (10R probability variation jackpot A) that triggers the transition to the second switching mode is provided.
When the second determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, the continuous number of times stored in the first storage means and the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means are updated, respectively. When the first determination result is obtained, the continuous number of times stored in the first storage means is updated, while the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means is not updated.
When the first determination result is obtained in the third gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means has not reached the first specified number of times, the third is accompanied by the end of the special gaming state. The third special transition means to transition to the game state,
When the second determination result is obtained in the third gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means has not reached the first specified number of times, the second is accompanied by the end of the special gaming state. Equipped with a fourth special transition means to transition to the game state,
When shifting from the third gaming state to the second gaming state by the fourth special transition means, the feature is characterized in that the memory of the continuous number of times in the first storage means is retained. The gaming machine described in A8.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, which of the two limiters operates first in the case of shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and in the case of shifting from the third gaming state to the second gaming state. Can make a difference. With such a configuration, the effect of suppressing the monotonicization of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature A10. Described in Feature A9, the transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is configured to be more difficult than the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature A10, the behavior (limiter operation order) after returning from the third game state to the second game state is performed while the first game state → the second game state is set as the main transition route to the second game state. It can be different from the main migration route. This makes it possible to more preferably exert the effect of suppressing the monotonicization of the game.

Feature A11. In the third gaming state, the number of gaming balls paid out per unit time when the gaming balls are launched into a predetermined flow path provided in the gaming area is smaller than that in the second gaming state, and the above-mentioned third gaming state is described. It is configured to be more than the first game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A10, wherein the second specified number of times is smaller than the difference between the first specified number of times and the second specified number of times.

As shown in feature A11, the configuration is such that the transition from the second game state in which the number of balls released per unit time is large to the third game state in which the number of balls released per unit time is relatively small, until the second limiter is activated. By making the player stay in the third game state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessively large number of balls in a short period of time and contribute to the soundness of the game.

Feature A12. As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot) and the second special gaming state (the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than the first special gaming state) ( 2R probability change big hit or special game state for special hit) is provided.
The special gaming state transition means has a means for shifting to the first special gaming state when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state.
As the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the third gaming state, the first determination result (2R probability variation jackpot) that triggers the transition to the high probability mode and the first switching mode, and the high probability mode and A second determination result (10R probability variation jackpot A) that triggers the transition to the second switching mode is provided.
When the second determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, the continuous number of times stored in the first storage means and the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means are updated, respectively. When the first determination result is obtained, the continuous number of times stored in the first storage means is updated, while the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means is not updated.
When the first determination result is obtained in the third gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means has not reached the first specified number of times, the second special gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A11, characterized in that the means for shifting to the third gaming state is provided.

According to the feature A12, in the second gaming state, a large number of balls can be obtained by looping a specific determination result → the first special gaming state → the second gaming state until the limiter is activated. When the limiter is activated from the second gaming state to shift to the third gaming state, a certain amount of ball ejection can be expected by shifting to the second special gaming state, but the rapid increase in the number of balls held is suppressed. It will be. After the transition to the third gaming state, by staying in the third gaming state until the limiter is activated, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessively large number of balls in a short period of time and contribute to the soundness of the game.

In addition, each technical idea shown in the feature A5 to the feature A12 may be applied to the said feature A1 to the feature A3.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technique of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for probability variation jackpot). Function to execute processing) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is won), the first transition means (main control device) for transitioning to the second gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the second gaming state in MPU 602 of 162) and
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (when the time saving limiter is activated), the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the third game state in MPU602) and
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the probability change limiter is activated), the third transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the first gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the first game state in MPU602) and
When the fourth transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached before the probability variation limiter is activated), the fourth transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the second game state) in MPU602 of
When the number of games executed in the first gaming state and the number of games executed in the second gaming state are compared at the same number of times, the fourth transition before the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the establishment of a condition is more difficult than the establishment of the first transition condition in the first gaming state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. After shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state via the third gaming state, the game is performed again aiming at the second gaming state. Here, although the third gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, it is more difficult than the first gaming state to shift to the most advantageous second gaming state. It has become. As described above, if the configuration is such that the transition to the second gaming state becomes difficult and then the third gaming state is restored to the first gaming state, it is possible to prevent the second gaming state from being excessively continuous. This is preferable in order to suppress, for example, an excessive increase in gambling (for example, an excessive number of balls in a short period of time) caused by the creation of a large number of balls.

In addition, as shown in this feature, "as the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state". , A third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state is provided. " "As the predetermined game state, the game ball is launched per unit time when the first game state (first normal game state) and the launch of the game ball toward the predetermined flow path in the game area are continued. A second game state (second normal game state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the means is set to be larger than the first game state. ) And, when the launch of the game ball toward the predetermined flow path in the game area is continued, the payout means is used for the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means per unit time. There is provided with a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls is set to be larger than the first gaming state and smaller than the second gaming state. " It may be changed to the description.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the third normal game state).
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot) and the second special gaming state (the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than the first special gaming state) ( 2R probability change jackpot correspondence special game state) is provided,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. As a result, it is easier to shift to the first special gaming state as compared with the first gaming state and the third gaming state.
A continuous number storage means (time saving continuous number counter) for storing at least the number of consecutive times that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained during the second gaming state, and
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot is won), the first transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state is the second gaming state. Function to execute the migration process to) and
When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the second transition condition is satisfied. A second transition means (a function of executing the transition process to the third gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the third gaming state upon the end of the special gaming state.
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the probability change limiter is activated), the third transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the first gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the first game state in MPU602) and
When the fourth transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached before the probability variation limiter is activated), the fourth transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the second game state) in MPU602 of
A gaming machine characterized in that the establishment of the fourth transition condition in the third gaming state is more difficult than the establishment of the first transition condition in the first gaming state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, after the transition to the second gaming state, the second gaming state and the first special gaming state loop until the number of consecutive determination results corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches the specified number of times. By doing so, you will have a chance to win a large number of balls. When the number of consecutive times reaches the specified number of times, the game shifts to the third gaming state, and when the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state, the game returns to the first gaming state. After returning to the first gaming state, the game will be played again aiming at the second gaming state. Here, in the third gaming state, it is more difficult to shift (return) to the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transition to the first special gaming state from being excessively continuous due to the transition to the second gaming state. This is preferable in order to suppress, for example, an excessive increase in gambling (for example, an excessive number of balls in a short period of time) caused by the creation of a large number of balls.

Feature B3. In the third gaming state, the determination result by the determination means is more likely to be the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information as compared with the first gaming state, and the predetermined flow path in the gaming area. When the gaming ball is launched to (right route), the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, so that the first gaming state and the third gaming state are compared with the above. The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized in that it is configured to easily shift to the second special gaming state.

According to the feature B3, in the third gaming state, the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is more likely to be obtained than in the first gaming state, and the monotonicization of the game in the third gaming state is suppressed. .. However, in the third gaming state, even if the determination result corresponds to the predetermined determination information, most of them shift to the second special gaming state in which the opening period of the variable ball entry portion is relatively short. In other words, although we can expect a certain amount of balls to come out, it is difficult to increase the number of balls we have compared to the second game state. If the third gaming state is intervened in the process of returning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, there is a concern that the existence of the third gaming state may give the player the impression that the existence of the third gaming state is troublesome. During the third game state, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by frequently causing the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and generating an appropriate number of balls.

Feature B4. When the state shifts to the third gaming state, the variable ball entry portion is more frequently brought into the receiving state as compared with the first gaming state, so that the ball is fired by the gaming ball launching means during a unit time. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, which is configured such that the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out by the payout means to the number of gaming balls is high.

According to the feature B4, in the third game state, the frequency at which the variable entry portion is in the accepting state is higher than in the first game state, so that the number of game balls fired during the unit time is paid out. The ratio of the number of game balls (so-called base) increases. That is, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the number of balls held as compared with the first game state. If the third gaming state is intervened in the process of returning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, there is a concern that the existence of the third gaming state may give the player the impression that the existence of the third gaming state is troublesome. During the third game state, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by generating an appropriate amount of balls by causing frequent switching to the acceptance state.

Feature B5. The feature that it is configured to make it more difficult to satisfy the fourth transition condition during the third gaming state than to satisfy the third transition condition during the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 and B4.

As shown in the feature B2 and the like, providing a return route from the third gaming state to the second gaming state realizes diversification of the game and suppresses a decrease in the degree of attention to the game during the third gaming state. It is preferable to do so. However, if the return route functions frequently, it will hinder the generation of a large number of balls as shown in feature B2, etc., but prevent it from becoming a factor that excessively incites gambling. I am concerned. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned concern is raised by making a difference so that the establishment of the fourth transition condition in the third gaming state becomes more difficult than the establishment of the third transition condition in the third gaming state. It can be mitigated suitably.

Feature B6. The continuous number of times storage means is the first storage means, and the specified number of times is the first specified number of times.
A second storage means (probability variation continuous number counter) for storing at least the number of consecutive times of a specific result (2R probability variation jackpot result) which is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information during the third gaming state is provided.
In the third transition means, the determination result by the determination means becomes the specific result during the third gaming state, and the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means becomes the second specified number of times (for example, 40 times). In that case, the third transition condition is satisfied, and the transition to the first gaming state is made with the end of the special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B2 to the feature B5, wherein the specific result is a trigger for transition to the second special gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the limiter for shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state is also used, it is possible to suitably alleviate the variation that the stay period in the third gaming state becomes extremely short. .. That is, an event in which the third game state is immediately terminated and the player returns to the first game state after shifting from the second game state in which a large number of balls can occur to the third game state in which a large number of balls do not occur. Can be less likely to occur. In this way, even with a configuration in which the third gaming state functions as a kind of time earner, the reduction of the number of balls held can be suppressed by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state until the limiter is activated. , The decrease in the degree of satisfaction of the player in the third gaming state can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B7. The specific result is the first specific result.
The determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination in the third gaming state includes the second specific result (10R probability variation jackpot A) having a lower winning probability than the first specific result.
The fourth transition means satisfies the fourth transition condition when the determination result by the determination means becomes the second specific result during the third gaming state, and the fourth transition means is accompanied by the end of the special gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B6, which is configured to shift to a gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the winning probability is relatively low in the second specific result during the third gaming state, the winning probability shifts (returns) to the second gaming state with one winning, while the winning probability is When a relatively high first specific result is obtained, the first specific result continues until the specified number of times is reached, so that the game shifts to the first gaming state (demotion), so that the third gaming state is in progress. It is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game.

Feature B8. As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The determination mode in the first gaming state is configured to be the low probability mode, and the determination mode in the second gaming state and the third gaming state is configured to be the high probability mode. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 and B7.

According to the feature B8, since both the second gaming state and the third gaming state correspond to the high probability mode, the probability itself of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information does not decrease. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the tempo, which is the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, from becoming slower as the game progresses, triggered by the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give the impression that the game is unnecessarily delayed in the configuration of shifting to the first game state via the third game state.

Incidentally, in the third gaming state, it is possible to delay the return to the first gaming state (earn time) by simply prolonging the execution period of the gaming times. However, as the name implies, such a configuration does not require active participation in the actual game, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game is reduced, which is expected to hinder the improvement of the utilization rate.

In addition, each technical idea shown in the feature B3 to the feature B8 may be applied to the said feature B1.

Further, each technical idea shown in the features B1 to B8 may be applied to the above-mentioned feature A group.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technique of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features C1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for probability variation jackpot). Function to execute processing) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is won), the first transition means (main control device) for transitioning to the second gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the second gaming state in MPU 602 of 162) and
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (when the time saving limiter is activated), the second transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the third game state in MPU602) and
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the probability change limiter is activated), the third transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the first gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the first game state) in the MPU 602 of
When the first transition means, the second transition means, and the third transition means shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in this order, and return to the first gaming state. The first gaming state via the third gaming state from the second gaming state under the condition that the gaming ball is continuously launched toward a predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area. The average required period (30 minutes) until the transition to is from the first gaming state to the second gaming state under the condition that the launching of the gaming ball toward the predetermined route is continuously executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the average required period (30 minutes) or more until the transition to the third gaming state is achieved.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the gaming state changes in the order of the first gaming state → the second gaming state → the third gaming state → the first gaming state. Regarding the player's advantage, the relationship is that the first game state <third game state <second game state, and the monotonicization of the game is suppressed by the change in the advantage.
Here, if the player immediately returns to the first gaming state immediately after shifting from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, there is a high possibility that the second gaming state will be re-shifted (re-promoted) in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball ejection. Although it is possible to suppress excessive ball ejection by lowering the advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the advantage between the first game state and the third game state becomes smaller. .. It is feared that this will be a major constraint in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the second to third game states are changed from the second game state to the third game state under the condition that the game balls are continuously launched (continuously without interruption) to a predetermined route. The average required period for transitioning to the first gaming state via the game is set to be equal to or longer than the average required period for transitioning from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state under the same circumstances. 2 By gaining an interval until the game returns to the game state, it is possible to prevent excessive ball ejection in a short time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restrictions on the advantage of the second gaming state and strengthening the sharpness of the game (creating a cohesive ball output). For the above reasons, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in this feature, "as the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state". , A third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state is provided. " "As the predetermined game state, the game ball is launched per unit time when the first game state (first normal game state) and the launch of the game ball toward the predetermined flow path in the game area are continued. A second game state (second normal game state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the means is set to be larger than the first game state. ) And, when the launch of the game ball toward the predetermined flow path in the game area is continued, the payout means is used for the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means per unit time. There is provided with a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) in which the ratio of the number of game balls is set to be larger than the first gaming state and smaller than the second gaming state. " It may be changed to the description.

Feature C2. It is provided with a number storage means (probability variation continuous number counter) for storing at least the number of consecutive times of a specific result (2R probability variation jackpot result) which is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information during the third gaming state.
The third transition means is when the determination result by the determination means becomes the specific result and the continuous number of times stored in the number storage means becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times) during the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the third transition condition is satisfied, and the transition to the first gaming state is performed upon the end of the special gaming state.

After shifting to the third gaming state, the staying period (required period) of the loop section from the third gaming state to the special gaming state is performed by staying in the third gaming state until the number of consecutive times with a specific result reaches a predetermined number of times. It is possible to reduce the variation such that the value becomes extremely short, and preferably exert the delay effect shown in the feature C1. Further, since the specific result is an opportunity to shift to the special gaming state, the third gaming state and the special gaming state are switched back and forth during the loop section. This is preferable in order to prevent the game progress from becoming monotonous.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot) and the second special gaming state (the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than the first special gaming state) ( 2R probability change jackpot correspondence special game state) is provided,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. As a result, it is easier to shift to the first special gaming state as compared with the first gaming state and the third gaming state.
A continuous number storage means (time saving continuous number counter) for storing at least the number of consecutive times that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained during the second gaming state, and
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot is won), the first transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state is the second gaming state. Function to execute the migration process to) and
When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the second transition condition is satisfied. A second transition means (a function of executing the transition process to the third gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the third gaming state upon the end of the special gaming state.
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the probability change limiter is activated), the third transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the first gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the first game state in MPU602) and
Equipped with
When the first transition means, the second transition means, and the third transition means shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in this order, and return to the first gaming state. The first gaming state via the third gaming state from the second gaming state under the condition that the gaming ball is continuously launched toward a predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area. The average required period (30 minutes) until the transition to is from the first gaming state to the second gaming state under the condition that the launching of the gaming ball toward the predetermined route is continuously executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the average required period (30 minutes) or more until the transition to the third gaming state is achieved.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the gaming state changes in the order of the first gaming state → the second gaming state → the third gaming state → the first gaming state. Regarding the player's advantage, the relationship is that the first game state <third game state <second game state, and the monotonicization of the game is suppressed by the change in the advantage. In particular, when the judgment result (big hit) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the second game state, the game shifts to the relatively advantageous first special game state, and the second game is performed until the number of times reaches the specified number of times. The state and the special game state loop. As a result, it is possible to expect a large number of balls to be launched by shifting to the second gaming state. On the other hand, in the third game state, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the game shifts to the second special game state, which is relatively disadvantageous, and the ball is ejected as compared with the second game state. Expectations are low.

Here, if the player immediately returns to the first gaming state immediately after shifting from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, there is a high possibility that the second gaming state will be re-shifted (re-promoted) in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball ejection. Although it is possible to suppress excessive ball ejection by lowering the advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the advantage between the first game state and the third game state becomes smaller. .. It is feared that this will be a major constraint in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the second to third game states are changed from the second game state to the third game state under the condition that the game balls are continuously launched (continuously without interruption) to a predetermined route. The average required period for transitioning to the first gaming state via the game is set to be equal to or longer than the average required period for transitioning from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state under the same circumstances. 2 By gaining an interval until the game returns to the game state, it is possible to prevent excessive ball ejection in a short time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restriction on the advantage of the second game state and strengthening the sharpness of the game (creating a cohesive ball output). For the above reasons, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C4. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot) and the second special gaming state (the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than the first special gaming state) ( 2R probability change jackpot correspondence special game state) is provided,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. As a result, it is easier to shift to the first special gaming state as compared with the first gaming state and the third gaming state.
A continuous number storage means (time saving continuous number counter) for storing at least the number of consecutive times that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained during the second gaming state, and
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot is won), the first transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state is the second gaming state. Function to execute the migration process to) and
When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the second transition condition is satisfied. A second transition means (a function of executing the transition process to the third gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the third gaming state upon the end of the special gaming state.
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the probability change limiter is activated), the third transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the first gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the first game state in MPU602) and
When the fourth transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached before the probability variation limiter is activated), the fourth transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the second game state) in MPU602 of
The first transition means, the second transition means, the third transition means, and the fourth transition means shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in this order, and the third gaming state. In a situation where the launch of a gaming ball toward a predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area is continuously executed when shifting to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. The average required period (30 minutes) from the second gaming state to the transition to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state via the third gaming state is toward the predetermined route. The average required period (30 minutes) or more from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state under the condition that the launching of the gaming ball is continuously executed. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the gaming state changes in the order of the first gaming state → the second gaming state → the third gaming state → the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Regarding the player's advantage, the relationship is that the first game state <third game state <second game state, and the monotonicization of the game is suppressed by the change in the advantage. In particular, when the judgment result (big hit) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the second game state, the game shifts to the relatively advantageous first special game state, and the second game is performed until the number of times reaches the specified number of times. The state and the special game state loop. As a result, it is possible to expect a large number of balls to be launched by shifting to the second gaming state. On the other hand, in the third game state, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the game shifts to the second special game state, which is relatively disadvantageous, and the ball is ejected as compared with the second game state. Expectations are low.

Here, if the player immediately returns to the first gaming state immediately after shifting from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, there is a high possibility that the second gaming state will be re-shifted (re-promoted) in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball ejection. Although it is possible to suppress excessive ball ejection by lowering the advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the advantage between the first game state and the third game state becomes smaller. .. It is feared that this will be a major constraint in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the second to third game states are changed from the second game state to the third game state under the condition that the game balls are continuously launched (continuously without interruption) to a predetermined route. The average required period for transitioning to the first gaming state via the game is set to be equal to or longer than the average required period for transitioning from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state under the same circumstances. 2 By gaining an interval until the game returns to the game state, it is possible to prevent excessive ball ejection in a short time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restriction on the advantage of the second game state and strengthening the sharpness of the game (creating a cohesive ball output). For the above reasons, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C5. The feature that it is configured to make it more difficult to satisfy the fourth transition condition during the third gaming state than to satisfy the third transition condition during the third gaming state. The gaming machine described in C4.

As shown in the feature C4, providing a return route from the third gaming state to the second gaming state realizes diversification of the game and suppresses a decrease in the degree of attention to the game during the third gaming state. It is preferable to do so. However, if the return route functions frequently, the effect shown in the feature C4 etc. (the effect of generating a cohesive ball and suppressing it from becoming a factor that excessively incites gambling) is exhibited. It is feared that it will be an obstacle above. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned concern is raised by making a difference so that the establishment of the fourth transition condition in the third gaming state becomes more difficult than the establishment of the third transition condition in the third gaming state. It can be mitigated suitably.

Feature C6. The game rotation control means is a game in which the operation period of the game rotation operation for which the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state is the operation period for which the third transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C5, which is configured to set the operating period so as to be longer than the operating period of the gaming round operation.

As shown in feature C6, the operation period of the game rounding operation when returning from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is from the operating period of the gaming rounding operation when returning from the third gaming state to the first gaming state. By lengthening the length, it is possible to preferably prevent the interval between the second gaming states (between a large number of balls) from becoming excessively short when the return route functions.

Feature C7. The game rotation control means is a game in which the operation period of the game rotation operation for which the third transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state is such that the third transition condition is not satisfied during the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or feature C6, which is configured to set the operating period so as to be longer than the operating period of the round-playing motion.

As shown in the feature C7, by shortening the operation period of the game round operation of the game round in which the third transition condition is not satisfied during the third game state, the game round can be rapidly advanced in the third game state. It will be possible. This is preferable in suppressing the extension of the game in the third game state and suppressing the decrease in the exhilaration of the game.

Feature C8. The continuous number of times storage means is the first storage means, and the specified number of times is the first specified number of times.
A second storage means (probability variation continuous number counter) for storing at least the number of consecutive times of a specific result (2R probability variation jackpot result) which is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information during the third gaming state is provided.
In the third transition means, the determination result by the determination means becomes the specific result and the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means becomes the second specified number of times (for example, 40 times) during the third gaming state. If this is the case, the third transition condition is satisfied, and the configuration is such that the transition to the first gaming state is performed upon the end of the special gaming state. Gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if the limiter for shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state is also used, it is possible to suitably alleviate the variation that the stay period in the third gaming state becomes extremely short. .. That is, an event in which the third game state is immediately terminated and the player returns to the first game state after shifting from the second game state in which a large number of balls can occur to the third game state in which a large number of balls do not occur. Can be less likely to occur.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the specific result triggers a transition to the second special gaming state.

Features As shown in C3, etc., even if the third game state functions as a kind of time earner, the reduction of the number of balls held is suppressed by repeating the transition to the second special game state until the limiter is activated. Can be done. This is preferable in order to prevent the existence of the third gaming state from becoming a factor that lowers the satisfaction of the player.

Feature C10. The second specified number of times (for example, 40 times) is larger than the first specified number of times (for example, 10 times).
In the game times control means, the operation period of the game turn operation in at least the first game state and the game times other than the game times that trigger the transition to the third game state in the third game state is the second game. The gaming machine according to feature C8 or feature C9, which is configured to set the operation period so as to be shorter than the operation period of the game rotation operation of each game time in the state.

According to the feature C10, in the third gaming state, the gaming times progress more quickly than in the second gaming state. This makes it difficult to give the impression that the third game state unnecessarily delays the game.

Feature C11. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on a player's operation, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot) and the second special gaming state (the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than the first special gaming state) ( 2R probability change jackpot correspondence special game state) is provided,
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode (the second switching mode and the high probability mode). A second normal gaming state) and a third gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode are provided.
In the second gaming state, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Compared to the first gaming state and the third gaming state, it is easier to shift to the first special gaming state, and in the third gaming state, the gaming ball is launched into a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area. In this case, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, so that it is easier to shift to the second special gaming state as compared with the second gaming state.
A first storage means (a time-saving continuous number counter) that stores the number of consecutive times that the first specific result, which is the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, is obtained during the second gaming state.
A second storage means (probability variation continuous number counter) for storing at least the number of consecutive times in which the second specific result, which is the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, is obtained during the third gaming state,
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot is won), the first transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state is the second gaming state. Function to execute the migration process to) and
When the first specific result is obtained in the second game state and the number of consecutive times stored in the first storage means reaches the first specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the second transition condition is satisfied and the special game is performed. A second transition means (a function of executing the transition process to the third gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the third gaming state when the state ends.
When the second specific result is obtained in the third game state and the number of consecutive times stored in the second storage means reaches the second specified number of times (for example, 40 times), the third transition condition is satisfied and the special game is performed. While shifting to the first gaming state with the end of the state, the number of consecutive times that the second specific result is obtained in the third gaming state and is stored in the second storage means is the second specified number of times (for example, 40). When the number of times has not been reached, the third transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to the first gaming state or the third gaming state) to shift to the third gaming state at the end of the special gaming state. Function to execute migration process) and
A fourth transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state when the fourth transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached before the probability variation limiter is activated). (Function to execute the transition process to the second game state) in MPU602 of
The establishment of the fourth transition condition in the third gaming state is configured to be more difficult than the establishment of the first transition condition in the first gaming state and the establishment of the third transition condition in the third gaming state. Has been
The first transition means, the second transition means, and the third transition means shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in this order, and from the third gaming state to the first gaming state. In the case of transitioning to, the second gaming state is passed through the third gaming state under the condition that the firing of the gaming ball toward the predetermined route (right route) in the gaming area is continuously executed. The average required period (30 minutes) until the transition to the first gaming state is the above-mentioned from the first gaming state to the situation where the launching of the gaming ball toward the predetermined route is continuously executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to have an average required period (30 minutes) or more until the transition to the third gaming state via the second gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the first gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode → the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode → the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. 3 The gaming state changes in the order of the gaming state → the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the monotonicization of the game is suppressed by the change in the advantage. In particular, when the judgment result (big hit) corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the second game state, the game shifts to the relatively advantageous first special game state, and the second game is performed until the number of times reaches the specified number of times. The state and the special game state loop. As a result, it is possible to expect a large number of balls to be launched by shifting to the second gaming state. On the other hand, in the third gaming state, when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, the process shifts to the second special gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous, and the third gaming state and the special gaming state loop. However, the expectation of launching the ball is lower than during the second game state.

Here, if the player immediately returns to the first gaming state immediately after shifting from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, there is a high possibility that the second gaming state will be re-shifted (re-promoted) in a short span. The occurrence of such an event can be a factor in excessive ball ejection. Although it is possible to suppress excessive ball ejection by lowering the advantage in the second game state, it is assumed that the sharpness of the game will decrease as the difference in the advantage between the first game state and the third game state becomes smaller. .. It is feared that this will be a major constraint in suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the second to third game states are changed from the second game state to the third game state under the condition that the game balls are continuously launched (continuously without interruption) to a predetermined route. The average required period for transitioning to the first gaming state via the game is set to be equal to or longer than the average required period for transitioning from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state under the same circumstances. 2 By gaining an interval until the game returns to the game state, it is possible to prevent excessive ball ejection in a short time. This is preferable in terms of relaxing the restriction on the advantage of the second game state and strengthening the sharpness of the game (creating a cohesive ball output). For the above reasons, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, each technical idea shown in the feature C2 to the feature C10 may be applied to the said feature C11.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features C1 to C11 may be applied to the above-mentioned feature A group to the feature B group.

<Characteristic D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technique of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is won), the first transition means (main control) for transitioning to the second gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. The function of executing the transition process from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the device 162) and
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 2R probability variation jackpot is won), the second transition means (main control device) for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state) in the MPU 602 of 162) and
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (when the time saving limiter is activated), the third transition means (main control device) for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state) in the MPU 602 of 162) and
When the 4th transition condition is satisfied in the 3rd gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is won), the 4th transition means (main control) for shifting to the 2nd gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. The MPU 602 of the device 162 is provided with a function of executing a transition process from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state).
The first game by the first transition means and the third transition means, as compared with the case where the second transition means transitions from the first gaming state to the third gaming state without going through the second gaming state. It is configured so that the possibility that the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state is lower when the transition from the state to the third gaming state is performed via the second gaming state. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the feature D1, when the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state is performed via the second gaming state, the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state is performed without going through the second gaming state. It becomes difficult to shift from the third gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player. That is, in the case of shifting to the third gaming state, the difficulty of returning to or promoting to the second gaming state differs depending on whether or not the player has passed through the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state. In particular, diversification of games is realized by giving preferential treatment so that promotion to the third gaming state is easier than returning to the third gaming state when the second gaming state is not passed. However, it is possible to suppress an excessive bias in the player's advantage.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is won), the first transition means (main control) for transitioning to the second gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. The function of executing the transition process from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the device 162) and
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (when the 2R probability variation jackpot is won), the second transition means (main control device) for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state) in the MPU 602 of 162) and
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (when the time saving limiter is activated), the third transition means (main control device) for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state) in the MPU 602 of 162) and
When the 4th transition condition is satisfied in the 3rd gaming state (when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is won), the 4th transition means (main control) for shifting to the 2nd gaming state with the end of the special gaming state. The function of executing the transition process from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the device 162) and
At least in the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the continuous number of times that the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific result (probability variation jackpot result) which is the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is stored. Means (continuous number counter for probability variation) and
When the specific result is obtained in the third gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times), the first game is accompanied by the end of the special gaming state. It is equipped with a fifth transition means (a function of executing a transition process from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the state.
When the first transition means and the third transition means shift from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, the predetermined number of times is reached during the third gaming state. The remaining number of times is the remaining number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached during the third gaming state when the second gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the third gaming state without going through the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be less than the number of times.

According to the feature D2, when the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state is performed via the second gaming state, the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state is performed without going through the second gaming state. It becomes difficult to shift from the third gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player. That is, in the case of shifting to the third gaming state, the fourth transition is made before the number of consecutive times = the predetermined number of times (the fifth transition condition is satisfied) depending on whether or not the player has passed through the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state. The difficulty of satisfying the condition, that is, the difficulty of returning to the second gaming state or promotion will be different. In particular, diversification of games is realized by giving preferential treatment so that promotion to the third gaming state is easier than returning to the third gaming state when the second gaming state is not passed. However, it is possible to suppress an excessive bias in the player's advantage.

Feature D3. The continuous number storage means is configured to be able to retain the storage of the continuous number of times even when the gaming state shifts between the second gaming state and the third gaming state (a configuration in which the continuous number of times counter is not reset). And
When the state shifts from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, the specific result (probability variation jackpot result) is obtained during the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the remaining number of times the predetermined number of times is reached during the third gaming state is reduced.

As shown in feature D3, the number of consecutive times is inherited from the second gaming state to the third gaming state, and the remaining number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached is reduced according to the number of times that a specific result is obtained during the second gaming state. If so, the fourth transition condition is satisfied before the predetermined number of times is reached in the case of transitioning to the third gaming state without going through the second gaming state than in the case of transitioning to the third gaming state via the second gaming state. The possibility is high. With such a configuration, the effect shown in the feature D2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D4. The transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state and the transition from the first gaming state to the third gaming state without going through the second gaming state. The case is a feature D2 or a feature characterized in that the probability that the fourth transition condition is satisfied is the same in each game round in the third gaming state in any case. The gaming machine described in D3.

According to the feature D4, in the case of not going through the second game state, the number of games that can be challenged in aiming to satisfy the fourth transition condition increases by the time when the number of consecutive times = the predetermined number of times (the fifth transition condition is satisfied). Become. According to the configuration in which the difference in superiority or inferiority is generated depending on the number of games as described above, it is possible to keep the probability of establishing the fourth transition condition low and to make a suitable profit while enjoying the game in the third game state.

Feature D5. The continuous number storage means is configured to be able to retain the storage of the continuous number of times even when the gaming state shifts between the second gaming state and the third gaming state (a configuration in which the continuous number of times counter is not reset). And
In the third gaming state, before the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches the predetermined number of times, the fourth transition condition is satisfied and the second gaming state is entered, and the second gaming state is in progress. It is characterized in that, by satisfying the third transition condition and returning to the third gaming state, the remaining number of times the predetermined number of times is reached during the third gaming state is reduced. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D4.

According to the feature D5, in the case of the third gaming state → the second gaming state → the third gaming state, the second third gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times than the first third gaming state. The number of remaining times is reduced. It is preferable to suppress an excessive loop between the third gaming state and the second gaming state in this way in order to ensure the soundness of the gaming machine.

Feature D6. During the second gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state triggered by the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information can be repeated (loopable) until the third transition condition is satisfied. And
The number of times that the special gaming state can be shifted to the special gaming state triggered by the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information during the second gaming state is the fourth in the third gaming state before the transition to the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D5, which changes according to the number of times the specific result is obtained until the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature D6, the number of loops between the second gaming state and the special gaming state changes according to the number of times a specific result is obtained in the third gaming state. By strengthening the relationship between the second gaming state and the third gaming state in this way, it is possible to more preferably exert the effect of attention to the game due to the diversification of the games.

Feature D7. The number of times that the special gaming state can be transitioned to the special gaming state triggered by the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information during the second gaming state is the remaining number when the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature D6, which is configured to decrease as the number of times increases.

According to the feature D7, the number of times that a specific result can be obtained in the third game state can be changed to the special game state during the second game state (the number of times that the loop is possible from the second game state to the special game state). ) Will decrease. With such a configuration, the substantial advantage in the second gaming state depends on the timing at which the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

Feature D8. As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the predetermined determination information are supported. There is a high-probability mode in which the probability of the judgment result is relatively high.
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D7, wherein the second gaming state and the third gaming state are gaming states in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode.

In the configuration shown in the feature D2 or the like, if the game in the third game state becomes monotonous, there is a concern that the player's willingness to play will decrease. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the lottery mode in the third gaming state is set as the high probability mode, and in the third gaming state, the frequency of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is increased, so that the third gaming state is in the third gaming state. It is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game.

Feature D9. A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of a determination result (big hit) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the predetermined determination information are supported. There is a high-probability mode in which the probability of a judgment result is relatively high.
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode.
The third gaming state is described in any one of the features D2 to D7, wherein the switching control mode is the first switching mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Gaming machine.

In the configuration shown in the feature D2 or the like, if the game in the third game state becomes monotonous, there is a concern that the player's willingness to play will decrease. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the lottery mode in the third gaming state is set as the high probability mode, and in the third gaming state, the frequency of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is increased, so that the third gaming state is in the third gaming state. It is possible to suitably suppress the monotonicization of the game. Further, the switching control mode is switched from the second switching mode to the first switching mode by shifting from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. Here, as shown in this feature, the high probability mode is maintained during the third game state, and the frequency of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is increased, so that the special game state → the game ball is paid out. It will be easier to enjoy the benefits. As a result, in the third gaming state, the reduction of the number of balls held can be suppressed as compared with the first gaming state. In this way, by ensuring the superiority of the third gaming state over the first gaming state from the viewpoint of holding the ball, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from rapidly decreasing due to the transition to the third gaming state. ..

Feature D10. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
It is provided with a control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing opening / closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state when the state shifts to the special gaming state. ,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state), the second gaming state (second normal gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state with the end of the special gaming state, and
When the second transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, the second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state, and
When the third transition condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, the third transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state with the end of the special gaming state, and
When the fourth transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state, the fourth transition means for shifting to the second gaming state with the end of the special gaming state, and
A continuous number storage means for storing the number of consecutive times in which the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific result (probability variation jackpot result) which is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. (Continuous number counter for probability variation) and
When the specific result is obtained at least in the third gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times), the first is accompanied by the end of the special gaming state. Equipped with a fifth transition means to transition to the gaming state,
When the first transition means and the third transition means shift from the first gaming state to the third gaming state via the second gaming state, the predetermined number of times is reached during the third gaming state. The remaining number of times is the remaining number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached during the third gaming state when the second gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the third gaming state without going through the second gaming state. It is configured to be less than the number of times,
During the second gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state triggered by the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information can be repeated until the third transition condition is satisfied.
The number of times that the special gaming state can be transitioned to the special gaming state triggered by the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information during the second gaming state is specified by the time the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to decrease as the number of results increases.

According to the feature D10, the number of times that a specific result can be obtained in the third game state can be changed to the special game state during the second game state (the number of times that the second game state to the special game state can be looped). ) Will decrease. With such a configuration, the substantial advantage in the second gaming state depends on the timing at which the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

The technical ideas shown in the features D3 to D9 may be applied to the features D1 and D10.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features B1 to B10 may be applied to the above-mentioned feature A group to the feature C group.

<Characteristic E group>
The following feature E group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technique of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features E1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (process for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for big hits). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). A special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state).
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (high frequency winning mode: special gaming state corresponding to a big hit) and the second special in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. There is a game state (low frequency winning mode: special game state for special hits).
As the predetermined judgment information, the first judgment information (random number group for big hit corresponding to high frequency support mode), the second judgment information (random number group for big hit corresponding to low frequency support mode), and the third judgment information ( Random number group for special hit) is provided,
The special game state transition means is
The judgment result by the judgment means is the first type judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information (for example, the jackpot result corresponding to the high frequency support mode) or the second type judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (for example, low frequency support). When the result of the jackpot corresponding to the mode) is reached, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and
It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when the determination result by the determination means becomes the third type determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the third determination information.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the probability of the first type determination result corresponding to the first determination information or the second type determination result corresponding to the second determination information is relative. A low probability mode having a relatively low probability and a high probability mode having a relatively high probability of becoming the first type determination result corresponding to the first determination information or the second type determination result corresponding to the second determination information. It is provided,
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player, and a third gaming state that corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state ( 3rd normal game state) is provided,
The probability that the third type determination result corresponding to the third determination information by the determination in the third game state will be obtained is the third type determination corresponding to the third determination information by the determination in the second game state. It is configured to be higher than the resulting probability,
When the number of consecutive times that the first type determination result is obtained and the first type determination result is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) in the second gaming state has not reached the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the first special gaming state is terminated. The first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state,
When the number of consecutive times of the first type determination result and the first type determination result reaches the specified number of times in the second gaming state, the third game is accompanied by the end of the first special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means for transitioning to a state.

In the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of consecutive times of the first type determination result does not reach the specified number, the special gaming state triggered by the first type determination result. After the end, it returns to the second gaming state. When such a loop is repeated and the number of consecutive times resulting in the first type determination result reaches a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the third gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. That is, reaching the specified number of times is an opportunity to shift to the third gaming state. In the third gaming state, the probability that the third type determination result corresponding to the third determination information is obtained is higher than in the second gaming state, and the transition to the second special gaming state occurs frequently. As a result, during the third game state, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held or increasing the number of balls held. According to the above configuration, the player who expects the transition to the third gaming state can move to the third gaming state while earning a ball by repeating the transition to the first special gaming state during the second gaming state. The goal is to make the transition, and the satisfaction level of the player can be suitably improved.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. A game ball based on a means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and a ball entering a ball entry unit (general winning opening 61, actuated ball entry unit 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. A gaming machine equipped with a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out (prize balls), and a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. The special information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of acquiring the hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring the special information (holding information) and the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means are obtained. The storable acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group for a jackpot). The determination means (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the determination means is performed, and the determination is made prior to the determination by the determination means or by the determination means. The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started based on the above, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. A game that controls predetermined notification means (operation port display units D1 and D2) so that the game rounding operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the determination result by the determination means become the determination results corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the game by the game times control means. A special game that shifts the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state) based on the end of the diversion operation. The state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the game ball rather than the accepted state. The variable ball entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) as the entry section, which can be switched to the non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and the variable when the game shifts to the special gaming state. Accepting the ball entry section And the control means for the variable ball entry section that switches to the non-acceptance state (the function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the start entry section. A variable mechanism (electric accessory 71) that can be switched to a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the receiving state, and a control means for the variable mechanism (main control device) that controls the variable mechanism. It is equipped with a function to execute electric service support processing in 162 MPU 602), and as the special game state, the first special game state (high frequency winning mode: special game state corresponding to a big hit) and the first special game state. A second special gaming state (low frequency winning mode: special gaming state corresponding to a special hit) is provided in which the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than that of the first. Judgment information (random number group for big hits corresponding to high frequency support mode), second judgment information (random number group for big hits corresponding to low frequency support mode), and third judgment information (random number group for special hits) The special gaming state transition means is provided with the first type determination result (big hit result corresponding to the high frequency support mode) or the second determination information whose determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first determination information. When the corresponding second type determination result (big hit result corresponding to the low frequency support mode) is obtained, the means for shifting to the first special gaming state and the determination result by the determination means correspond to the third determination information. It has a means for shifting to the second special gaming state when a third type determination result (special hit result) is obtained, and as a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism. , A first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state longer than the first switching mode are provided. As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is made by the determination means, the probability of the first type determination result corresponding to the first determination information or the second type determination result corresponding to the second determination information is relative. A low probability mode and a high probability mode having a relatively high probability of becoming the first type determination result corresponding to the first determination information or the second type determination result corresponding to the second determination information are provided. As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the second switching mode and the high probability mode are used. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) that corresponds to the above-mentioned first gaming state and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a game corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and more than the second gaming state. A third gaming state (third normal gaming state) that is advantageous to the person is provided, and the probability that the third type determination result corresponding to the third determination information will be obtained by the determination in the third gaming state is determined. It is configured so that the probability of the third type determination result corresponding to the third determination information is higher than the probability of the third type determination result corresponding to the third determination information in the second gaming state, and the first type determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. Moreover, when the number of consecutive times resulting in the first type determination result has not reached the specified number of times, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state with the end of the first special gaming state, and the second. When the number of consecutive times that the first type determination result is obtained and the first type determination result is reached reaches the specified number of times in the gaming state, the game shifts to the third gaming state with the end of the first special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a second transition means. It is also possible to say.

Feature E2. In the determination in the second gaming state, the second type determination result can be obtained.
When the second type determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the first switching mode is supported except for the third gaming state among the predetermined gaming states with the end of the first special gaming state. It is characterized by having a third transition means (a function of executing a transition process to the first normal gaming state or the like by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to the gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state). Feature The gaming machine described in E1.

According to the feature E2, in order to aim at the third gaming state, it is necessary to make the first type determination result continuous while avoiding the second type determination result. With such a configuration, the tension of the game in the second game state can be suitably increased.

Feature E3. During the third gaming state, the regulation means for restricting the transition to the gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode among the predetermined gaming states triggered by the second type determination result (for winning a prize in the first operating port). The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that it is provided with a configuration in which the gaming times related to the second operating port are forcibly terminated by a special hit based on the above.

If the third game state ends with the second type determination result immediately after shifting to the third game state through the second game state, the player's motivation to play in the third game state rapidly decreases. Then there is concern. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, it is restricted that the second type determination result is obtained after the transition to the third gaming state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the configuration that can be the second type determination result from becoming a factor that extremely shortens the staying time in the third gaming state, and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature E4. The specified number of times is the first specified number of times (for example, 10 times).
In the third game state, the number of consecutive times that the second type determination result (2R probability variation thick hit result: the jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) and the second type determination result is the second specified number of times is When the number of times (for example, 40 times) has not been reached, the means for shifting to the third gaming state with the end of the first special gaming state (MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs the transition process to the third normal gaming state). Function to execute) and
In the third game state, the number of consecutive times that the second type determination result is obtained (2R probability variation jackpot result: jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) and the second type determination result is the second specified number of times. When it reaches, the means for shifting to the gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode among the predetermined gaming states with the end of the first special gaming state (shifting to the first normal gaming state in MPU 602 of the main control device 162). The gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

According to the configuration shown in the feature E4, after the transition to the third gaming state, the third gaming state and the first special gaming state loop until the number of consecutive times resulting in the second type determination result reaches the second specified number of times. It will be. With such a configuration, the period of stay in the third gaming state is earned, and immediately after the transition to the third gaming state, the third gaming state is demoted to another predetermined gaming state such as the first gaming state. It can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E5. In the first special gaming state that shifts based on the fact that the second type determination result is obtained during the third gaming state, the first type determination result is obtained during the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the variable entry portion is configured to be in a receiving state for a shorter period of time as compared with the transitioned first special gaming state.

According to the feature E5, it is possible to suppress that the superiority of the third gaming state becomes extremely high. This is preferable in improving the soundness of the game.

In particular, according to the combination with the feature E3, in the third game state, even if the number of balls released in each first special game state is small, the first special game state is repeated, so that the tempo of the game is increased and the ball is released. It is possible to earn money and preferably improve the satisfaction level of the player.

Feature E6. A means for shifting to the second gaming state with the end of the first special gaming state when the first type determination result is obtained in the third gaming state.
A continuous number storage means (probability variation continuous number counter) for storing a continuous number of times as a determination result that triggers a transition to the game state corresponding to the high probability mode in the second gaming state and the third gaming state.
When the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number of times storage means becomes the second specified number of times, the second gaming state and the third of the predetermined gaming states are accompanied by the end of the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or feature E5, which comprises means for shifting to another gaming state (for example, a first normal gaming state) other than the gaming state.

According to the feature E6, after the transition to the third gaming state, the first type determination result is obtained and the transition to the second gaming state (promotion or return) and the number of times the second type determination result is obtained are the first. 2 When the specified number of times is reached, there may be a case of shifting (demotion) to another gaming state such as the first gaming state. In this way, if the game is branched, the period of stay in the third game state can be suppressed from becoming extremely short, and the satisfaction level of the player after the transition to the third game state can be suitably improved. Can be done.

Feature E7. When the first type determination result is obtained in the third gaming state, a means for shifting to the second gaming state with the end of the first special gaming state is provided.
When the transition from the third gaming state to the second gaming state is made, the transition to the third gaming state is more difficult than when the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is made. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E6, which is characterized by being

According to the feature E7, the difficulty of transitioning from the second game state to the third game state differs depending on which route the second game state is reached, and the second while realizing the diversification of the game. It is possible to suitably increase the tension of the game in the game state.

Feature E8. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player, and
A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry section (general winning slot 61, operating ball entry section 62, 63, variable winning device 64, 65) provided in the game area. It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device 222).
In the MPU 602 of the special information acquisition means (main control device 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (actuated ball entry section 62, 63) as the ball entry section. A function that executes the process of acquiring pending information) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 in the RAM 604 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the actuation port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the result of the determination is As a result of the notification corresponding to the above, the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game times control means (a function of executing the game times control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the actuation port), and
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). With a special game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) to shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the third normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a received state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the received state. Variable entry section (variable winning devices 64, 65) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. 71) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (high frequency winning mode: special gaming state corresponding to a big hit) and the second special in which the variable entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special gaming state. There is a game state (low frequency winning mode: special game state for special hits).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group for big hit corresponding to high frequency support mode) and second determination information (random number group for special hit) are provided.
The special game state transition means is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information (big hit result corresponding to the high frequency support mode), the means for shifting to the first special gaming state (main control device 162). (Function to execute the transition process to the first special gaming state in MPU602) and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the second determination information, the means for shifting to the second special gaming state (MPU 602 of the main control device 162). 2 A function to execute the transition process to the special game state)
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode).
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the first determination information are supported. A high-probability mode in which the probability of the first determination result is relatively high is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state (first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and the first gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode. A second gaming state (second normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player, and a third gaming state that corresponds to the first switching mode and the high probability mode and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state ( 3rd normal game state) is provided,
The probability that the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information by the determination in the third gaming state will be the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information by the determination in the second gaming state. It is configured to be higher than the probability of
When the number of consecutive times that the first determination result is obtained and the first determination result is obtained does not reach the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) in the second gaming state, the said is accompanied by the end of the first special gaming state. As a means to shift to the second game state,
When the number of consecutive times that the first determination result is obtained and the first determination result is the specified number of times in the second gaming state reaches the specified number of times, the game shifts to the third gaming state with the end of the first special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means to make it.

In the second gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, if the number of consecutive times resulting in the first determination result has not reached the specified number of times, the first special gaming state triggered by the first determination result is entered. After the end, it returns to the second gaming state. When such a loop is repeated and the number of consecutive times resulting in the first determination result reaches a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the third gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode. That is, reaching the specified number of times is an opportunity to shift to the third gaming state. In the third gaming state, the probability that the second determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained is higher than in the second gaming state, and the transition to the second special gaming state occurs frequently. As a result, during the third game state, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held or increasing the number of balls held. According to the above configuration, the player who expects to shift to the third gaming state moves to the third gaming state while earning a ball by repeating the transition to the first special gaming state during the second gaming state. The goal is to make the transition, and the satisfaction level of the player can be suitably improved.

The technical ideas shown in the features D3 to D9 may be applied to the features D1 and D10.

Further, the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E8 may be applied to the above-mentioned feature A group to the feature D group.

Incidentally, it is also possible to change the description of "predetermined skill state" shown in the above-mentioned feature A group to feature E group to the description of "normal gaming state".

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the firing thereof. It is provided with a ball passage (guide passage 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, and each of these game parts. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 61, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 41 ... Game ball launch handle, 60 ... Game board, 62 ... First actuating ball entry section, 62a ... First actuating port, 63 ... Second actuating ball entry section, 63a ... Second Operating port, 64 ... Upper variable winning device, 65 ... Lower variable winning device, 71 ... Electric accessory, 75 ... Symbol display device, 75a ... Display screen, 81 ... Main display unit, 162 ... Main control device, 602 ... MPU , 604 ... RAM, D ... main display unit, D1 ... first operating port display unit, D2 ... second operating port display unit, PE ... gaming area.

Claims (5)

The game board where the game area is formed, and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a gaming ball based on the entry into the entry portion provided in the gaming area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the entry section, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and a determination means.
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. With this as one game time, a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that a game time operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable ball entry section as the ball entry section, which can be switched between an acceptance state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the acceptance state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special gaming state is entered is provided.
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the period in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state is shorter than that of the first special gaming state are provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, the first gaming state, the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. There is also a third gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player,
In the second gaming state, when the game ball is launched into a predetermined flow path in the gaming area, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, whereby the first. Compared to the gaming state and the third gaming state, it is easier to shift to the first special gaming state.
A continuous number storage means for storing at least the number of consecutive times that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained during the second gaming state.
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, the first transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state and
When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times stored in the continuous number storage means reaches the specified number, the second transition condition is satisfied and the special gaming state is set. A second transition means for transitioning to the third gaming state upon termination, and
A third transition means for shifting to the first gaming state with the end of the special gaming state when the third transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state.
A fourth transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state when the fourth transition condition is satisfied in the third gaming state is provided.
The first transition means, the second transition means, the third transition means, and the fourth transition means shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state and the third gaming state in this order, and the third gaming state. When shifting to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the second game ball is continuously launched toward a predetermined route in the gaming area. During the average required period from the gaming state to the transition to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state via the third gaming state, the firing of the gaming ball toward the predetermined route is continuous. It is characterized in that it is configured to be longer than the average required period from the first gaming state to the transition to the third gaming state via the second gaming state under the situation of being executed. A game machine to play. A claim characterized in that it is configured to make it more difficult to satisfy the fourth transition condition during the third gaming state than to satisfy the third transition condition during the third gaming state. Item 1. The gaming machine according to item 1. The game rotation control means is a game in which the operation period of the game rotation operation for which the fourth transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state is the operation period for which the third transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the operating period is set so as to be longer than the operating period of the gaming round operation. The game rotation control means is a game in which the operation period of the game rotation operation for which the third transition condition is satisfied during the third gaming state is such that the third transition condition is not satisfied during the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the operating period is set so as to be longer than the operating period of the gaming round operation. The continuous number of times storage means is the first storage means, and the specified number of times is the first specified number of times.
A second storage means for storing at least the number of consecutive times in which a specific result, which is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, is obtained during the third gaming state, is provided.
The third transition means is the third when the determination result by the determination means becomes the specific result and the continuous number of times stored in the second storage means becomes the second specified number during the third gaming state. 3. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the first gaming state is performed upon the end of the special gaming state. ..

Images